Design and Execution of Steel Structures and Composite Steel-Concrete Buildings

Page 1
AUG 2003 Draft Revision of ISO 8800

Design and execution of steel structures and
composite steel-concrete buildings
Procedure
Source: NBR 8800:1986
CB-02: Brazilian Committee on Construction
EC 02:
NBR 8800:200 x - Design and construction of steel and composite structures
for buildings
Descriptors: Design and construction. Steel structures. Steel and concrete
composite structures. Buildings.
It is planned to cancel and replace the full NBR 8800:1986
Keywords: Design and implementation structures, structures
289 pages
steel, composite steel-concrete structures, buildings
Abstract
Foreword
Introduction
Objective 1
2 Normative References
3 Definitions, symbols and units
4 General conditions of project
5 Specific conditions for sizing steel elements
6 Specific conditions for design of steel connections
7 Specific conditions for design of steel-concrete composite members
8 Specific conditions for design of composite joints
9 Additional Considerations resistance
10 Additional conditions of project
11 limit states
12 Manufacturing, assembly and quality control
Annex A (Normative) - structural steel and metal bonding materials
Annex B (Normative) - AP
Annex C (Normative) - Recommended maximum displacements
Annex D (Normative) - Bending Moment resistant characteristic of non-slender beams
Annex E (Normative) - Local Buckling in compressed bars
Annex F (Normative) - Bending Moment resistant characteristic of slender beams
Annex G (Normative) - shear force resistant characteristics including the effect of field drift
Annex H (Normative) - Length buckling by bending and twisting of compressed bars
Annex J (Normative) - Length buckling by bending the pillars of continuous structures
Annex K (normative) - Normal force of elastic buckling
Annex G (Normative) - Openings souls of beams
Annex F (Normative) - Fatigue
Annex C (Normative) - Particular requirements for bars of varying section
Annex E (Normative) - Best practices for implementing structures
Annex Q (normative) - Beams composite steel-concrete
Annex R (normative) - Pillars mixed steel-concrete
Annex S (normative) - steel-concrete composite slabs
Annex T (normative) - steel-concrete composite connections
Annex U (normative) - Control of cracking in concrete composite beams
Annex V (Normative) - Procedures for approximate elastic second-order analysis
Annex
(Normative)-- Orientation
Guidance for
floor vibration
Annex W
X (Normative)
to in
vibrations
due to wind
Page 2
2
NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision
Foreword
ABNT - Brazilian Association of Technical Standards - is the National Standardization Forum.
The Brazilian Standards, whose content is the responsibility of the Brazilian Committees (CB) and
Standardization Bodies Sector (ONS), are prepared by Study Groups (EC),
formed by representatives of the sectors involved including: producers,
consumers and neutral (universities, laboratories and others).
The Brazilian Standard projects, developed through CB and ONS circulate to Vote
National ABNT among members and other interested parties.
This standard contains Annexes A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V and W
normative character.
This standard cancels and replaces in its entirety NBR 8800:1986 - Design and implementation of
steel structures for buildings - Procedure.
This standard includes the steel-concrete composite columns, the steel-concrete composite slabs and links
composite steel-concrete, which were not foreseen in the NBR 8800:1986 - Design and implementation of
steel structures for buildings - Procedure.
Introduction
For the development of this standard philosophy of the previous was maintained: NBR 8800, so that the
this standard set fits the general criteria governing the design ambient temperature and
implementation of structural steel and composite steel-concrete structures of buildings. Thus, it should
be complemented by other rules which establish criteria for specific structures.
Objective 1
1.1 This standard, based on the method of limit states, the general principles that
should be followed in the design room temperature and execution, including inspection,
structures of steel and steel-concrete composite structures for buildings in which:
- Profiles are rolled or welded steel;
- The elements of steel sections, plates and bars have thickness
less than 3 mm;
- Connections are bolted or welded or composite steel-concrete.
A related type of profile requirement does not apply to steel formwork slabs of composite steelconcrete and the shear connectors C profile cold-formed, and related to the thickness
steel formwork at least mentioned, shims and filler plates.
The requirements of this standard apply only to steel profiles non-hybrids. Case
hybrid profiles are used, the necessary adjustments must be made.
1.2 The steel-concrete composite structures, including steel-concrete composite joints, provided by
this Standard are those formed by components of steel and concrete, reinforced or otherwise,
working together. The concrete may be of normal density or low density
except when some restriction is made

in a specific part of the Standard.
Page 3
1.3 Profiles, rolled or welded shall be constructed obeying the Brazilian standards
applicable. In the absence of such standards, it is permissible to use test results from the literature
specialized or foreign standards or specifications, as provided in 1.7. Profiles
soldiers can be fabricated by depositing weld metal or by electro-fusion.
1.4 The general principles in this standard apply to building structures
for housing and commercial and industrial uses and public buildings, and the solutions
usual for bars and links. Also apply to structures pedestrian walkways.
1.5 To strengthen or repair of existing structures, the application of this standard may require study
and special adaptation to take into account the date of construction, type and quality of materials
were used.
1.6 The design of a structure made
in accordance with this Standard should follow
coherently all your criteria.
1.7 The responsibility for the design shall identify all applicable limit states, even though
some are not mentioned in this standard, and design the structure so that they do not
are violated. For types of structures or situations not covered by this standard, or covered
simply, it is permissible to use test results, professional literature
or foreign standards or specifications. In such cases, the responsibility for the project, if
necessary, shall make the necessary adjustments to maintain the level of security provided by
this Standard. Additionally, tests may be performed following procedures are
internationally accepted, the relevant literature used should have recognition and
acceptance by the international technical community and the standards and specifications
foreign should be internationally recognized and ready to use, being valid.
2 Normative References
The standards listed below contain provisions which, through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of this Standard. Editions indicated were valid at the time
this publication. All standards are subject to revision, we recommend to those who perform
agreements based on this to verify the possibility of applying the most recent editions of
standards listed below. ABNT has the information of the Brazilian Standards in force
any given time.
ASME B18.2.6: 1996 - Fasteners for use in structural applications
ASME B46.1: 2002, 2003 - Surface texture, surface roughness, waviness and lay
ASTM A6/A6M: 2001b - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural
Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASTM A108: 1999 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard
Quality
ASTM A307: 2000 - Standard specification for carbon steel bolts and studs, 60,000 PSI tensile
strength
ASTM A325: 2000 - Standard specification for structural bolts, steel, heat-treated, 120/105 ksi
minimum tensile strength
Page 4
4
ASTM A325M: 2003 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel Heat Treated 830 MPa
Minimum Tensile Strength [Metric]
ASTM A490: 2000 - Standard specification for steel heat-treated structural bolts, 150 ksi
minimum tensile strength
ASTM A490M: 2000 Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and
10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints [Metric]
ASTM A568/A568M: 2003 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength,
Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for
ASTM A588/A588M: 2001 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. [100 mm] Thick
ASTM A668/A668M: 2002 - Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for
General Industrial Use
ASTM A913/A913M: 2001 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes
of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process (QST)
ASTM F436: 2002 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
AWS A2.4: 1998 - Standard symbols for welding, brazing, and nondestructive examination
AWS A5.1: 2003 - Specification for carbon steel electrodes for shielded metal arc welding
AWS A5.5: 1996 - Specification for low-alloy steel electrodes for shielded metal arc welding
AWS A5.17: 1997 - Specification for carbon steel electrodes and fluxes for submerged arc
welding
AWS A5.18: 2001 - Specification for carbon steel filler metals for gas shielded arc welding
AWS A5.20: 1995 - Specification for carbon steel electrodes for flux cored arc welding
AWS A5.23: 1997 - Specification for low-alloy steel electrodes and fluxes for submerged arc
welding
AWS A5.28: 1996 - Specification for low-alloy steel electrodes for gas shielded arc welding
AWS A5.29: 1998 - Specification for low-alloy steel electrodes for flux cored arc welding
AWS D1.1: 2002 - Structural welding code - steel
ISO 898-1:1999 - Mechanical properties of fasteners made
of carbon steel and alloy steel - Part
1: Bolts, screws and studs
NBR 5000:1981 - Heavy plate steel, low alloy and high strength
NBR 5004:1981 - thin sheets of steel, low alloy and high strength
Page 5
NBR 5008:1997 - Heavy plate and thick coils, low alloy steel, corrosion resistant
Atmospheric, for structural use - Requirements
NBR 5920:1997 - thin cold and thin cold rolled coils sheets, low alloy steel, resistant
atmospheric corrosion for structural use - Requirements
NBR 5921:1997 - Hot Tin plates and thin hot rolled coil steel, low alloy,
resistant to atmospheric corrosion, for structural use - Requirements
NBR 6118:2003 - Design of concrete structures
NBR 6120:1980 - Loads for calculation of building structures
NBR 6123:1988 - Forces due to wind on buildings
NBR 6313:1986 - Part molten carbon steel for general use
NBR 6648:1984 - Heavy plate carbon steel for structural use
NBR 6649:1986 - Cold Plates thin carbon steel for structural use
NBR 6650:1986 - Hot thin sheets of carbon steel for structural use
NBR 7007:2002 - Steels for structural carbon and microalloyed use and general
NBR 7188:1984 - Mobile loads on road bridges and pedestrian walkways
NBR 7242:1990 - Part fused high-strength steel for structural purposes
NBR 8261:1983 - Tubular Profile, carbon steel, cold shape, with and without sewing section
circular, square or rectangular for structural uses
NBR 8681:2003 - Stocks and security structures
NBR 14323:1999 - Design of steel structures of buildings in fire
NBR 14762:2001 - Design of steel structures consist of cold formed profiles
Research Council on Structural Connections: 2000 - Specification for structural joints using
ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts
3 Definitions, symbols and units
3.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this International Standard, the following definitions:
3.1.1 Action: Any influence or set of influences can produce stress states
or deformation or rigid body motion in a structure.
3.1.2 share calculation: value per share used in the design of the structure.
Page 6
3.1.3 Structural Steel: Steel produced based on the specification that classifies as structural
and establishes the chemical composition and mechanical properties.
3.1.4 Structural analysis: Determination of the effects of actions (normal force, shear force,
bending moment, stress, displacement, etc..) bars and links.
3.1.5 rod: Component structure wherein the length is much greater than the dimensions
the cross section.
3.1.6 weighting resistance: Value by which the resistance should be divided
characteristic to take into account uncertainties inherent in and get the same resistance
calculation (see 3.1.16).
3.1.7 Unlocked length: Length between two sections contained laterally (see
3.1.18).
3.1.8 component: a constituent part of a profile as table, soul, tab, etc., or bar or whatever.
another component of the structure.
3.1.9 limit states: states from which a structure no longer fulfills the purpose for
which it was designed.
3.1.10 limit states: States that, by its occurrence, repetition or duration
cause effects incompatible with the conditions of use of the structure, such as dislocations
excessive, permanent deformations and vibrations. Also called limit states
service.
3.1.11 ultimate limit states: corresponding to the ruin of the whole structure states, or part of
same, by rupture, excessive plastic deformation, instability, etc..
3.1.12 element width: width of the flat portion of a constituent element of a profile,
measured in the plane of the cross section.
3.1.13 Hybrid Profile: Profile elements whose components have steels with properties
different.
3.1.14 non-hybrid Profile: Profile elements whose components have the same steel.
3.1.15-thickness aspect ratio: ratio between the flat part of a constituent element of
a profile and thickness.
3.1.16 Calculation of resistance: Resistance value used in the design of the structure. It
obtained from the characteristic value of the material properties and the sections together
with a formula deduced rationally, based on analytical and / or experimental model, and
that represents the element's behavior in the limit state. Resistance calculation is equal
the characteristic resistance value divided by a coefficient that takes into account the uncertainties
attached thereto.
3.1.17 characteristic strength: Value set from tests or some rational method
connected to a resistance property.
Page 7
3.1.18 section contained laterally: Section compressed whose face has its lateral displacement
prevented or impeded submit twist.
3.1.19 tubular section: circular or rectangular hollow section steel with uniform thickness,
laminated or formed by cold working with continuous longitudinal weld.
3.1.20 characteristic value of shares: A value that quantifies the actions provided for in the rules of
actions and set the NBR 8681. A action with its characteristic value can be referred
simply as characteristic action.
3.1.21 conventional value of shares outstanding: arbitrated value for exceptional actions
by consensus between the building owner and government authorities
have an interest in it.
3.2 Symbols
The symbols are used in this standard, regarding the steel structures and composite steelconcrete base is constituted by symbols (same size as the current text) and Symbols
subscribed.
The basic symbols used most frequently in this Standard are set out in
3.2.1 and 3.2.2 subscripts symbols in the same length plain text, to
easy viewing.
The general symbology is found established in this subsection and the more specific symbology
some parts of this standard is presented in the relevant sections in order to simplify
understanding and therefore the application of established concepts.
3.2.1 Symbols basis
3.2.1.1 Roman Lowercase
the
the
the
b
bf
bf
bfc
bs
bw
d
db
dF
dh
dp
ds
and
f
f CD
- Distance in general; distance between transverse stiffeners; region height

compressed into slabs of composite beams; center to center distance between beams
- Length of the openings
- Width; effective width of the concrete screed
- Effective width
- Table width
- Width of the pillar table; width of the compressed table
- Width of stiffener
- The nominal size of the fillet weld
- Diameter in general; total height of the cross section; cylinder diameter
- Diameter of the screw; outer diameter of the thread of threaded round bar
- Distance from the upper surface of the concrete slab to the center of gravity of the area
the effective formwork
- Hole Diameter
- Pin diameter
- Distance from the center of gravity of the steel profile to the center of gravity
armor
- Eccentricity of loading
- Voltage characteristic obtained by testing or resistant strain calculation
- Calculation of the actual resistance to compression
Page 8
8
f ck

- Characteristic compressive strength of concrete
f ckn
fckb
f ctm
f dc
f dt
fr
fu
f ub
f ucs
fy
f yF
f ys
fw
g
h
hc
hcs
hf
hF
hthe
hr
ht
kcs
ks
kv
l
lc
ln
lw
n
No '
nb
ncs
nE
p
qRd
r
r the
r x, Ry
s
t
tc
tF
- Characteristic strength of the concrete density

low-density
normal
compression
to the compression
- Average tensile strength of concrete
- Voltage resistant compression calculation on the upper surface of the concrete slab
- Voltage resistant traction calculation table at the bottom of the steel beam
- Residual stress
- Tensile strength of steel traction
- Tensile strength of the bolt material or round bar threaded at
traction
- Tensile strength of steel connector
- Yield strength of steel at normal stress
- Yield strength of the steel pan
- Yield strength of steel reinforcement
- Minimum tensile strength of weld metal
- Drilling template; acceleration of gravity
- Overall height; Cell height; height of floor
- Height of the concrete slab above the steel pan
- Length of the pin after welding
- Effective height
- Rib height of steel formwork
- Distance between the centroid of the tables; height of the openings
- Height of the slab coating
- Total height of the slab, including the concrete and formwork
- Initial stiffness of the connectors
- Initial stiffness of the bars of the armature; parameter associated tear
between holes
- Coefficient for shear buckling of the soul
- Length overall; length unlocked laterally length
cylinder; buckling length of the column
- Clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the hole and the edge of the hole
or adjacent the edge of the connected part
- Length of action of the force in the longitudinal direction of the beam
- Total length of the weld
- Number of connectors
- Number of connectors between the section with concentrated load and the adjacent section
of zero moment
- Number of screws
- Number of shear connectors per rib
- The ratio between the modulus of elasticity of steel and the elastic modulus
concrete
- Tax width of the screw
- Calculating a resistance to shear connector
- Radius of gyration; radius
- Polar radius of gyration of the gross section in relation to the center of shear
- Radii of gyration of the cross section with respect to x and y axes,
respectively
- Longitudinal spacing between two consecutive holes; minimum spacing
between edges of openings
- Overall thickness
- Thickness of the concrete slab
- Thickness of mold steel
Page 9
tf
t fc
t fcs
t
- Thickness of table
- Thickness of the pillar table, thickness of the compressed table
- The thickness of the board connector
- Thickness of plate pulled
tp
s
tw
t toilets
w
xthe
Y the
yc
y LNP
yp
ys
yt
- Thickness of the stiffener

- Web thickness
- Web thickness of the connector
- Size of the fillet leg strengthening or contour
- Coordinates of the center of shear
- Distance from the center of gravity of the compressed portion of the steel beam section
to the upper surface of this beam
- The neutral axis position
- Distance from the neutral axis of the section laminated to the top surface of the steel beam
- Distance from the center of gravity to the center of the steel shear beam
- Distance from the center of gravity of the compressed portion of the steel beam section
to the upper surface of this beam
3.2.1.2 Roman Uppercase

The
The
the
The
ac
The
at
The
b
The
be
The
c
The
cs
The
and
The
f
The
F
The
f
The
fe
The
fg
The
fn
The
fnt
The
g
The
MB
The
n
The
s
The
sa
The
w
Cb
Cd
C d'
Cm
Cpg
Cred
Ct
- General area
- Cross-sectional area of the steel profile
- Compressed area of the steel section profile
- Pulled area of the steel section profile
- Gross area of bolt
- Resistant area or effective area of a bolt or threaded round bar
- Cross-sectional area of the connected elements; cross-sectional area
Concrete
- Cross-sectional area of the connector
- Effective net cross-sectional area
- Effective area
- Area of mold steel
- Area of the table
- Effective area of table pulled
- Floor area of tensioned or compressed table
- Net area of tensioned or compressed table
- Net area of the pulled table
- Gross cross-sectional area
- Theoretical area of the face melting
- Net area
- Total transverse reinforcement area per unit length, including
additional equipment and any equipment provided to bending of the slab; area
cross section of the longitudinal reinforcement
- Area of additional armor
- Effective area of shear; effective area of the weld; area of the soul
- Modification factor for bending moment diagram nonuniform
- Resistance calculation of the compressed thickness of the concrete slab
- Resistance calculation of the compressed portion of the steel profile
- Equivalence of moments
- Coefficient used in the calculation of slender beams
- Reduction factor of the strength of the shear pin type connector with
head
- Reduction coefficient used in the calculation of the effective net area
Page 10
10
Cv
Cw
D
Dthe
E

- Coefficient of shear
- Constant warping of the cross section
- Outer diameter of tubular circular section; OD
eyelet head
- Diameter of apertures
- The tangent modulus of elasticity of steel
Ec
- Initial secant modulus of elasticity of concrete at the limit of resistance

compression
- Modulus of elasticity of concrete reduced due to the effects of shrinkage and
creep
- Initial secant modulus of elasticity of the concrete in the low density limit
Compressive strength
- Secant modulus of elasticity at normal density concrete limit
compressive strength
- Tangent modulus of elasticity of steel reinforcement of concrete
- Characteristic value of permanent actions
- Characteristic value of variable actions
- Characteristic value of the outstanding shares
- Modulus of transverse elasticity of steel, equal to 0.385 E; characteristic action
permanent; center of gravity of the bar
- Moment of inertia
- Moment of inertia of the cross section of the steel profile
- Moment of inertia of the cross section of the concrete
- Moment of inertia effective
- Moment of inertia of the pillar
- Moment of inertia of the cross section of the reinforcement of concrete
- Moment of inertia of uniform twisting of the steel section
- Moment of inertia of the homogenized composite section
- Moment of inertia of the beam
- Moments of inertia of the cross section with respect to x and y axes,
respectively
- Buckling coefficient used in sizing bars
compressed
- Or length will generally
- Distance between the sections of maximum positive and negative moments
- Length unlocked
- Length of the U profile connector
- Length of the stretch of positive moment; distance between points
zero moment
- Will theorist steel pan toward the ribs
- Height of the floor for a pillar
- Shear span
- Length of the input strength of concrete
- The beam will
- Bending moment
- Resistant bending moment calculation of steel girder isolated
- Bending moment of elastic buckling
- Bending moment plasticizing section
- Bending moment corresponding to the onset of flow
- Resistant bending moment calculation
- Bending moment resistant plasticizing calculation
E 'c
Ecb
Ecn
Es
FG
FQ
FQ, exc
G
I
I the
Ic
If
Ip
Is
IT
I tr
Iv
I x, Ry
K
L
L'
Lb
Lcs
Land
LF
Lp
Ls
Lt
Lv
M
M the
M cr
Mp
l
Mr
M Rd
M Rd, p
l
Page 11
M Rd ;xM Rd, y
M Rk
MRd
MRd,dist
M-
;M-
- Resistant to bending moments calculated respectively around the axes x

ey cross section
- Characteristic bending moment resistant
- Resistant bending moment calculation in the region of negative moment
- Resistant bending moment calculation in the region of negative moment, for
limit state of lateral buckling Distorted
- Resistant bending moments for calculating the left and right ends,
11
Rd,esq
Rd,dirrespectively, module of composite beams subjected to negative moment in

case of continuous beams, or mixed connections in the case of semicontinuous beams
M- Bending moment resistant characteristic in the region of negative moment

Rk
M Sd
- Bending moment calculation requestor
M Sd, ;GM' Sd, G - Applicants bending moments calculation due to active actions
respectively before and after the strength of concrete reaches f 0.75
ck
M Sd, max
- Maximum bending moment calculation requesting the bar, determined by
the analysis of the first order
M Sd, q
- Bending moment calculation in requesting biapoiada beam function of the abscissa x
M Sd,; xM Sd, y - Requesting bending moments of calculation respectively about axes
x and y of the cross section
N
- Length of action of the force in the longitudinal direction of the beam, the number of
cycles of variation of tension during the useful life of the structure
Nc, R
- Normal force resistant compression calculation
Nand
- Normal force of elastic buckling
Np
- Normal force corresponding to the flow cross section
l
NRd
- Tough normal force calculation
NRd, p
- Tough normal force calculation of the cross section to the total lamination
l
NSd
- Normal force requestor compression calculation
Nt, Rd
- Normal force resistant traction calculation
Ny
- Normal force corresponding to the flow of the compression section
effective cross
P
- Thread pitch
Pdub
- Calculating a resistance screw, taking into account the shear and
contact pressure in the holes
PSRD
- Calculation of resistance of the armature bars
Q
- Variable action; coefficient of local buckling; additional traction force
caused by the leverage
Qthe
; Qs
- Coefficients that take into account the local buckling of AA and AL elements,
respectively
QRd
- Sum of the individual resistance calculation, q
Rd, The connectors
shear section located between the maximum positive moment and the section
adjacent zero moment
Q Rd
'
- Sum of the individual resistance calculation, q
Rd, The connectors
shear located between sections of maximum positive and negative moments
R
- Fillet radius between the head and the body of the lug
Rd
- Resistance calculation
RFIL
- Reduction factor for joints up only a couple of fillet weld
transverse
RPJP
- Reduction factor for welds notch partial penetration
RRd
- Resistant request calculation
RRk
- Resistant feature request
Sd
- Request for calculation
Page 12
12
Tb
Td
TRds
TSd
Vp
l
VRd
VRd
l
VRd, p
V

- Minimum strength prestressing screw
- Calculation of resistance region pulled the steel profile
- Sturdy traction force calculation in the longitudinal reinforcement bars
- Requesting traction force calculation on the screw without leverage
- Shear force corresponding to yielding of the soul shear
- Resistant shear force calculation
- Sturdy longitudinal shear force calculation of composite slabs
- Resistant shear force calculation to puncture caused by a load
concentrated
- Sturdy vertical shear force calculation of composite slabs
VRd,
Rk v
VRkt
VSd
VSd, q
W
W the
W c, W t
Wf
W tr
W x, W y
Zpa
Zpc
Zps
- Shear resistant feature

- Shear resistant characteristics including the effect of field drift
- Shear strength calculation requestor
- Shear strength calculation in requesting biapoiada beam function of the abscissa x
- Minimum modulus of section of elastic strength relative to bending axis
- Resistance of the elastic modulus of the steel section profile
- Elastic modulus of resistance of the tablet and pulled next to the section,
respectively, relative to the bending axis
- Effective elastic modulus of resistance
- Modulus of the homogenized elastic resistance section in composite beams
- Elastic resistance modules with respect to x and y axes, respectively
- Module plastic resistance of the steel profile section
- Module plastic resistance of the concrete section
- Module plastic resistance of the armature of the concrete section
3.2.1.3 Greek Lowercase
the
cn
vm
cs
smu
su
sy
the
cb
cn
cna
cs
- Related to sizing the compression curve coefficient; coefficient

related to the effect Rsch
- Reduction factor
- Coefficient of thermal expansion of steel
- Coefficient of thermal expansion of the normal density concrete
- Coefficient which takes into account the rotation capacity required for connection
- Contributor steel, scroll, arrow
- Specific deformation of free shrinkage of concrete
- Deformation of the concrete armor involved
- Strain corresponding to the tensile strength of the armor isolated
- Strain corresponding to the yield strength of the armor isolated
- Diameter of the reinforcement bars
- Weighting coefficient of resistance
- Specific weight of steel; weighting the strength of steel
- Specific weight of concrete; weighting the resistance of the
concrete
- Specific weight of the concrete of low density
- Specific weight of concrete normal density unarmored
- Specific weight of normal density concrete with reinforcement
- Weighting coefficient of resistance of the connector
- Weighting of permanent actions
- Weighting of variables shares
- Weighting coefficient of stiffness
Page 13
the
rel
the
cn
cb
- Weighting the strength of steel armor

- Coefficient for setting the order of magnitude of the horizontal displacements
- Slenderness parameter
- Reduced slenderness ratio
- Slenderness parameter corresponding to the lamination
- Slenderness parameter corresponding to the onset of yield
- Relative slenderness
- Average coefficient of friction
- Poisson's ratio of structural steel
- Poisson's ratio of concrete normal density
- Poisson's ratio of concrete of low density
13

dist
cr
c, R
and
Rd
Sd
SR
TH
Rk
oj
;
1j 2j
associated
with the distortion
compressive
strength
- Reduction factor for
lateral buckling
of the
cross section with
- Tension in general
- Tension buckling
- Tension buckling
- Critical elastic buckling stress
- Resistant strain calculation
- Requesting tension calculation
- Permissible limit for the range of variation of stresses
- Permissible limit of range of voltages, for an infinite number of
request cycles
- Voltage characteristic shear
- Factor combination of variable actions
- Utilization factors of
3.2.1.4 Greek Uppercase

u
s
u
i
- Deformation capacity of the armature bars

- Deformation capacity of the connection
- SUM
3.2.2 Symbols subscribed

3.2.2.1 Roman Lowercase
the
b
c
cb
cn
cs
d
and
f
f
g
i
n
- Steel
- Screw; threaded round bar
- Concrete; compression
- Low density concrete
- Normal density concrete
- Shear connector
- Calculation
- Elastic
- Effective
- Table
- Gross
- Order number
- Net
Page 14
14
pl
s
t
u
w
x
y

- Lamination
- Armor
- Traction
- Break
- Soul; solder
- On the x-axis
- Runoff; relative to the y axis
3.2.2.2 Roman Uppercase

F
Rd
Rk
Sd
- Mold steel
- Resistant calculation
- Resistant characteristic
- Requesting calculation
3.3 Units
Most of the expressions presented in this standard is dimensionless, so they should be
employed quantities with consistent units. When units are mentioned, they are
according to the International System of Units.
4 General conditions of project
4.1 General
4.1.1 The fully or partially executed works with steel frame or mixed structure
steel-concrete must comply with elaborate design in accordance with this standard, under
responsibility of a legally qualified professional with experience in design and construction
these structures, which must be manufactured and constructed by competent companies and
keep running under competent supervision.
4.1.2 It is understood as the set of design calculations, drawings, specifications and manufacturing
Mounting structure.
4.2 Design drawings
4.2.1 The design drawings must be executed in an appropriate scale for the level of
desired information. Should contain all the necessary data for the detailed
structure for the implementation of assembly drawings and the design of foundations.
4.2.2 The design drawings shall indicate which standards were used and give
specifications for all structural materials used.
4.2.3 In addition to the materials, data must be reported to the actions of calculation adopted and
calculation of internal forces to be resisted by bars and links, when required to
proper preparation of fabrication drawings.
4.2.4 For connections with high strength bolts, the design drawings shall indicate whether the
tightening will be normal or initial prestressing, and in the latter case, if the bolts to work
shear, if the connection is friction or contact.
Page 15
4.2.5 Welded connections should be characterized by appropriate symbology containing
to complete its execution information in accordance with AWS A2.4.
4.2.6 In the case of industrial buildings, shall be made
on the design drawings
schema location of the most important actions resulting from equipment that will be
supported by the structure, the values
of these actions and, eventually, the data for consideration
dynamic effects.
4.2.7 Where necessary, the conditions should be considered for installation and indicated
provided lifting points and weights of the parts of the structure. Should be taken into account
coefficients appropriate for the type of equipment to be used in assembling impact.
In addition, must be given the positions that are temporarily occupied by
main or auxiliary equipment mounting on the structure, mooring position
cables or spies, etc.. Other situations that may affect the safety of the structure should also
be considered.
4.2.8 In cases where the lengths of the frame pieces may be influenced by
15
temperature variations during assembly, must be given the variation ranges

considered.
4.2.9 should be indicated in the design drawings of the contraflechas beams soul filled and
lattice.
4.3 Drawings manufacturing
4.3.1 The fabrication drawings should translate faithfully to the factory, the information
contained in the design drawings, giving complete information to manufacture all
Component elements of the structure, including materials and specifications,
lease, type and size of all bolts, welds factory and field.
4.3.2 Where necessary, it should be indicated on the drawings the execution sequence of links
important to avoid the appearance of excessive residual stresses or warping.
4.4 Assembly drawings
The assembly drawings shall indicate the main dimensions of the structure, brand of parts,
dimensions of bars (when required for approval), elevations of lower faces of plates
base pillars, all dimensions for detail placement of anchors and other
information necessary for the assembly of the structure. Should be clearly indicated all
permanent elements or essential to the integrity of the temporary structure partially
Built. Also applies here to the provisions in 4.3.2.
4.5 Materials
4.5.1 Introduction
4.5.1.1 The structural steel and metal materials approved for use by this connection
Standard 4.5.2 and are cited in the concrete and steel for armor in 4.5.3.
4.5.1.2 Full details of the materials listed in 4.5.2 and 4.5.3 are the
corresponding specifications and more information on the structural steels and materials
metal binding are in Annex A.
Page 16
16
4.5.2 Structural Steels and metal bonding materials

4.5.2 Steels 1 for profiles, rods and plates
4.5.2.1.1 steels approved for use in this standard for profiles, rods and plates are those with
structural qualification ensured by Brazilian standard specification or standard or foreign,
provided they have characteristic resistance maximum flow 450 MPa and relationship between
resistance characteristics to rupture and drain not less than 1.18.
4.5.2.1.2 is still allows the use of other structural steels since they have resistance
feature to the maximum flow 450 MPa, the relationship between resistance characteristics
rupture and drain not less than 1.25 and that the responsibility for the project to analyze the
differences between these grades and specifications mentioned in 4.5.2.1.1 and mainly
the differences between the sampling methods used in determining its properties
mechanical.
4.5.2.1.3 It is recommended not to use structural steels without qualification. However, this is tolerated
use, provided free of surface imperfections, only minor parts and details
importance, where the properties of steel and its weldability not affect the resistance of
structure. If this type of steel is used, should not be adopted in the project higher values
180 MPa and 300 MPa for the characteristic flow resistance and resistance
feature at break, respectively.
4.5.2.2 Steel castings and forgings
Where the use of fabricated structural elements with molten steel is necessary or
wrought Brazilian standards related to the issue or standard or must be obeyed
foreign specification.
4.5.2.3 Bolts
The screw steel low carbon must meet ASTM A307 or ISO 898
Class 4.6, the high-strength bolts, including nuts and washers appropriate
hardened, shall comply with ASTM A325, ASTM A325M or ISO 898 Class 8.8 and
screws alloy steel hardened and tempered shall meet ASTM A490, ASTM A490M or
898 ISO Class 10.9.
4.5.2.4 Electrodes, welding wire and flux
4.5.2.4.1 The electrodes, wires and fluxes for welding shall meet the following
Specifications:
a) for mild steel electrodes, coated, for electric arc-welding: AWS A5.1;
b) electrodes for low alloy steel, coated, for electric arc-welding: AWS
A5.5;
c) for bare mild steel electrodes and flux for submerged arc welding: AWS A5.17;
d) for mild steel electrodes for electric arc welding with shielding gas: AWS
A5.18;
Page 17
e) for mild steel electrodes for arc welding with flux in the core: AWS A5.20;
f) to bare steel electrodes, low alloy and flux for submerged arc welding: AWS
A5.23;
g) for low alloy electrodes for arc welding with shielding gas: AWS
A5.28;
h) for low alloy electrodes for arc welding with flux in the core: AWS A5.29.
4.5.2.4.2 Approval of specifications for electrodes cited in 4.5.2.4.1 is taken
regardless of the requirements for impact tests which in most cases are not
required for buildings.
4.5.2.5 Shear Connectors
4.5.2.5.1 The pin type connectors steel with heads shall meet the requirements of Chapter 7
of AWS D1.1: 2002.
4.5.2.5.2 The steel shear connectors in the profile laminate U must comply with 4.5.2.1.
17
4.5.2.5.3 The steel shear connectors C profile cold-formed must obey

requirements of ISO 14762.
4.5.2.6 Steel mold of the slab
The steel mold of the slab and its coat must comply with Section S.7 (Annex
S).
4.5.2.7 Identification
The materials and products used in the structure must be identified by their specification,
including type or grade, if applicable, using the following methods:
a) quality certificates provided by plants or producers duly
related to the products supplied;
b) legible markings applied to the material by the producer, in accordance with the standards of
corresponding standards.
4.5.2.8 General Mechanical properties
For calculation purposes should be adopted for steels listed, the following values
Mechanical properties:
a) tangent modulus,
E = 205000 MPa ;
=03;
the
b) Poisson's ratio,
= 12 10 - 6 C - 1;
the
c) coefficient of thermal expansion,
Page 18
18

d) specific weight,
= 77 kN / m 3 .
the
4.5.3 Concrete and steel reinforcement

4.5.3.1 The properties of normal density concrete should conform to NBR 6118. So
the characteristic compressive strength of concrete of this type should be between 10 MPa and
50 MPa, and the following values
should be used:
a) initial secant modulus of elasticity in compression yield strength,
E = 4760 f
, Where E cn f ckn are given in megapascals (f
cn
ckn
characteristic of normal density concrete compressive);
b) Poisson's ratio,
= 020 ;
cn
c) coefficient of thermal expansion,

d) specific weight,
reinforced concrete.
cn
ckn is the resistance
cn
= 10 - 5 C - 1;
= 24 kN / m 3 in concrete without armor and
cna
= 25 kN / m 3 on
4.5.3.2 The properties of low density concrete must comply with standard or
relevant domestic or foreign specifications. This type of concrete should have specific weight
at least 15 kN / m
3 unarmored, and the modulus of elasticity in the initial drying limit
compression strength in megapascals should be taken equal to:
E
cb
= 40 5, 15, f
cb ckb
where:
is the specific weight of the concrete of low density, without reinforcement in a quilonewton
cb
cubic meter;
f ckb is the characteristic strength of the concrete low-density compression in
megapascals.
For Poisson's ratio, can be used value of 0.2 (equal to the density of the concrete
normal). The thermal expansion coefficient must be determined by specific study.
4.5.3.3 this standard, the secant modulus of elasticity, compressive strength characteristic,
Poisson's ratio, thermal expansion coefficient and the specific weight of the concrete will be
always represented by E
cF ck, c, c and c, Respectively. So if the concrete is of
=
Normal density must be taken
E =E
f, = f , = , = and
on
c
cn ck ckn c
cn c
cn c
cn
concrete without reinforcement or =
for reinforced concrete; and if low density
c
cna
= for the concrete without reinforcement or =
E =E
f, = f , = , = and
c
cb ck ckb c
cb c
cb c
cb
c
cba
for reinforced concrete.
4.5.3.4 The properties of steel reinforcement shall conform to NBR 6118.
Page 19
19
4.6 Basis for sizing

The method of states limits used for sizing the components of a
structure requires that no applicable limit state is exceeded when the structure is
subject to all appropriate combinations of actions. When the structure no longer meets
objectives for which it was designed, one or more states limit has been exceeded. The states
ultimate limits are related to the safety of the structure subject to more combinations
unfavorable actions of calculation provided for in the lifetime, in a transient situation or
When acting exceptional action. The limit states are related
performance of the structure under normal service conditions.
1 4.6 Dimensioning for ultimate limit states
4.6.1.1 The design for the ultimate limit states implies that the request
Tough for calculating each component or assembly of the structure equal to or greater than the
active calculation request. In some situations, it is necessary to combine through
expressions of appropriate interaction terms reflecting relations between active requests
calculation and resistant requests from different calculation. Each sturdy request calculation, S
is calculated for the applicable limit state and is equal to the quotient of the sturdy request
characteristic S RkAnd the weighting coefficient of resistance. Resistant requests
S characteristics Rkand the coefficient of resistance are given in sections 5, 6, 7 and 8, depending
ultimate limit state. Other security-related checks are in Section 9.
4.6.1.2 The calculation of active request must be determined for combinations of actions
calculation that are applicable, in accordance with 4.7.
Rd,
4.6.2 Scaling to limit states

The structure should be checked for serviceability limit states in accordance with the requirements
Section 11.
4.7 Actions and combinations of actions
4.7.1 Values
and classification
The actions to be taken in the design of structures and their components are set
by Brazilian standards NBR 6120, NBR NBR 6123 and 7188, or other applicable standards, and
also in Annex B of this Standard. According to NBR 8681, these shares are classified
according to their variability in time, in the following three categories:
- F G: Permanent actions - actions resulting from the own weight of the structure and all
Component elements of the building (floors, tiles, permanent walls, coatings and
finishes, fixed equipment, etc..), which are called actions
Direct permanent, and actions from effects of support settlements, retraction
materials and prestressing, which are called indirect permanent actions;
- F QVarying actions - actions resulting from the use and occupation of the building (due to actions
overloads on floors and roofs, equipment and movable partitions, etc..), pressure
hydrostatic, buoyancy of earth, wind, temperature variation, etc..;
- F Q, exc
: Exceptional actions - actions resulting from fires, explosions, shocks
vehicles, seismic effects, etc..
Page 20
20
In the rules of combinations of actions for ultimate limit states and use, given
4.7.2 and 4.7.3 respectively, actions must be taken with their characteristic values
according to NBR 8681. Exceptional actions can be taken to their values
exceptional standard.
4.7.2 Combinations of actions for ultimate limit states
4.7.2.1 Combinations of actions for ultimate limit states, according to NBR 8681,
are:
a) normal combinations latest:
m ( F ) + F + n ( F )
gi Gi
1qQ1
qj oj Qj
i=1
j=2
b) past or special construction (temporary situation) combinations:
m ( F ) + F + n (
F )
gi Gi
1qQ1
qj oj,f Qj
=
=
i1
j2
c) exceptional recent combinations, except for the case where the outstanding action
Fire follows (see 4.7.2.2):
n
m ( F ) + F
+ (
F )
gi Gi
Q,exc
qj oj,f Qj
i=1
j=1
Where:
FGi are the permanent actions;
FQ1 variable is considered as the main action in the normal combinations, or as
leading to transient situation in special combinations or building;
FQjother variables are the shares;
FQ, exc
is the exceptional action;
are the weighting coefficients of permanent actions, provided in Table 1 (for
gi
further information should be consulted to NBR 8681);
are the weighting coefficients of the variables shares, provided in Table 1 (for
qj
further information should be consulted to NBR 8681);
factors are the combination of variables that can act concomitantly actions
oj
with the main variable action F
Q1Under normal combinations, as shown in Table 2;
j, f factors are effective combination of live loads that may act

concurrently with the main variable action F
During the transitional situation, or
Q1
with exceptional action F
.
The
factor
factor
is
equal
to oj adopted in combinations
Q, exc
j, f
Page 21
normal except when the main action F
very small role, in which case
(Table 2).
21
have a time
Q1or exceptional action F
Q, exc
may
be
taken
equal
to
the
corresponding
j, f
Table 1 - Weighting coefficients actions
Combinations
Normal
Special or
Construction
Exceptional
Own weight
structures
metal
Weight
own
structures
premolded
1.25
(1.00)
1.15
(1.00)
1.10
(1.00)
1.30
(1.00)
1.20
(1.00)
1.15
(1.00)
Effect of temperature 2)
Permanent actions ( g) 1) 3)
Direct
Own weight of
Own weight of
structures
elements
molded in
constructive
site and
industrialized
elements
with additions "in
constructive
loco "
industrialized
1.35
1.40
(1.00)
(1.00)
1.25
1.30
(1.00)
(1.00)
1.15
1.20
(1.00)
(1.00)
Shares variables (q) 1) 4)
Wind action
Own weight
elements
Indirect
constructive
and in general
equipment
1.50
(1.00)
1.40
(1.00)
1.30
(1.00)
1.20
(0)
1.20
(0)
0
(0)
Other variables actions

including those arising
the use and occupation
Normal
1.20
1.40
1.50
Special or
Construction
1.00
1.20
1.30
Exceptional
1.00
1.00
1.00
NOTES:
1)The values
in parentheses correspond to the coefficients for permanent actions favorable to safety;
variables and exceptional actions favorable safety should not be included in the combinations.
2)The temperature effect mentioned does not include the generated equipment, which must be regarded as action
resulting from the use and occupancy of the building.
3)Direct permanent actions that are not conducive to security may optionally be considered all
grouped with weighting equal to 1.35 when the stock variables arising from the use and occupation
is equal to or greater than 5 kN / m2Or 1.40 when it is not.
4)If the direct permanent actions that are not conducive to safety are grouped variables actions that do not
are favorable safety can optionally also be considered all grouped with coefficient
equal weighting of 1.40 when the variables arising from the use and occupation shares are equal to or greater than 5
2Or 1.50 when it is not (even in this case, the temperature effect can be seen
kN / m
separately, with its own weighting).
4.7.2.2 Combinations of exceptional past actions to ultimate limit states in
fire situation should be determined according to NBR 14323.
4.7.3 Combinations of actions for serviceability limit states
In the combinations of actions for serviceability limit states are considered all actions
permanent, including permanent deformation imposed, and the actions variables
corresponding to each of the types of combinations as follows:
Page 22
22

a) quasi-permanent combinations of use (combinations that may act during
much of the lifetime of the structure, the order of half of that period):
m F + n ( F )
Gi
j2Qj
i=1
j=1
b) frequent use combinations (combinations that repeat often
5 times 50, or having
during the lifetime of the structure, of the order of 10
total duration equal to a not insignificant part of that period, of the order of 5%):
m F + F + n ( F )
Gi
1 Q1
j2Qj
i=1
j=2
c) use of rare combinations (combinations that can act at most a few
time during the life of the structure):
Where:
m F + F + n ( F )
Gi Q1
j1Qj
i=1
j=2
FGi are the permanent actions;

FQ1is the main variable action of the combination;
F are the common values
of the action;
1j Qj
F are the quasi-permanent values
of the action;
2j Qj
, factors are used as table 2.
1j 2j
Table 2 - Factors combo and use factors

Share
1)
oj
0.6
0.6
1j
0.5
0.3
2j
Uniform temperature variations compared to the local average annual
0.3
Dynamic pressure of the wind on structures in general
0
Actions resulting from the use and occupation:
- No predominance of equipment that remain fixed for long
periods of time or high concentrations of persons
0.5
0.4
0.3
- With predominance of equipment that remain fixed for long
periods of time or high concentrations of persons
0.7
0.6
0.4
- Libraries, archives, warehouses, workshops and garages
0.8
0.7
0.6
Moving loads and their dynamic effects:
- Beams bearing crane
1.0
0.8
0.5
- Pedestrian Walkways
0.6
0.4
0.3
Note:
1)The coefficients must be accepted as 1.0 shares for variables of the same nature of the variable action
oj
main F Q1
.
Page 23
4.7.4 Cases not covered in this Standard
For cases of combinations of actions related to the ultimate limit states or use
not covered in this standard shall be in compliance with the requirements of ISO 8681.
4.8 Stability and structural analysis
4.8.1 General
4.8.1.1 This subsection deals with the analysis and stability of structures. Thus, 4.8.2 are
defined braced and not braced structures and provided guidelines for assessment
their stability, and 4.8.3, general rules are presented for structural analysis
for verification of ultimate limit states.
4.8.1.2 Structural analysis for verification of limit states must be ugly
as stipulated in this standard parts dealing with the issue. If analysis is done
second order, should follow the procedures given in 4.8.3, but using the
combinations of actions appropriate for these types of limit states.
4.8.2 Structural Stability
4.8.2.1 General
The stability of the structure as a whole and must be guaranteed for each component element,
considering the significant actions of the deformed structure effects.
4.8.2.2 braced structures
4.8.2.2.1 In those trusses and structures whose lateral stability is guaranteed by system
suitable bracing, shear walls structural or other means
equivalents, here classified as braced structures, the buckling coefficient K to
be used in the design of compressed bars, provided the requirements of
4.8.5, can be taken equal to 1.0 unless it is demonstrated by the analysis of the structure, or
23
if applicable, by the use of attachments H and J, which values

less than 1.0 may be used. Case
there is a rigid connection between beams and columns, reducing the stiffness adjustments of pillars requested outside
elastic allowed.
4.8.2.2.2 A second-order analysis that includes the initial imperfections of the structure,
as 4.8.3, can be used in place of the requirements presented in 4.8.5.
4.8.2.2.3 vertical bracing system must be determined by structural analysis and
be adequate to prevent buckling and maintain the stability of the structure, including resisting
the destabilizing effects of gravity loads on pillars and other structural components
vertical unable to withstand lateral forces, combinations of shares for calculation
stipulated in 4.7.
4.8.2.2.4 Lets consider that the internal and external structural walls and slabs
and floor covering part of the vertical bracing system provided
appropriately sized and connected to the structure. Columns, beams and diagonal when used
as part of the vertical bracing system can be considered as bars
a vertical trellis swing study of buckling and lateral stability of the structure.
Page 24
24
The axial deformation of all the bars of the vertical bracing system must be included
the study of lateral stability.
4.8.2.3 Structures not braced
4.8.2.3.1 In structures where the lateral stability depends on the flexural rigidity of beams and columns
rigidly connected to each other, here classified as not braced structures, the coefficient
K buckling of compressed bars should be determined by structural analysis or, if
applicable, as Annex J. The destabilizing effects of gravity loads on pillars and
other vertical structural members without ability to withstand horizontal forces
should be considered in the analysis. Adjustments reducing the stiffness of pillars requested outside
elastic allowed.
4.8.2.3.2 If analysis of the structure is taken directly into account the effects of
initial imperfections of the structure as a whole, as 4.8.4.1, 4.8.4.2 and 4.8.4.3 can be
consider the buckling coefficient K equal to 1.0.
4.8.2.3.3 In determining the effects of the strength of the instability should be included
structural and axial deformation of the pillars, combinations of shares for calculating stipulated
in 4.7.
4.8.3 Structural Analysis
4.8.3.1 Types of analysis and second order effects
4.8.3.1.1 The internal forces calculation in bars and links the structure to check
the ultimate limit states, must be obtained through elastic analysis, as 4.8.3.1.2,
except when permissions for other types of analysis are explained in parts of this
Standard.
4.8.3.1.2 Elastic second-order analysis must be rigorous, as 4.8.3.1.3, for
combinations appropriate actions listed in 4.7. Still admits the use of elastic analysis
estimated and approximate second order, described in 4.8.3.3 and 4.8.3.4 respectively,
depending on the sensitivity of the structure to horizontal displacements (see 4.8.3.2) and since
the conditions shown are met. In any analysis must take into
account the effects of initial imperfections of the structure as a whole, according to
4.8.4.
4.8.3.1.3 The term rigorous elastic second-order analysis that in which the equations
equilibrium is established in the deformed configuration of the structure. This type of analysis
usually has a high degree of complexity, requiring a strategy of numerical resolution
involving iterative procedures, and allows properly account the overall effects and
local second order, defined in 4.8.3.1.4 and 4.8.3.1.5 respectively. Its validity in
However, it is limited in principle to cases in which the second order effects do not exceed
40% analysis of the first order. If this occurs, we must increase the rigidity of the structure to
reduce the horizontal displacements, or place an elastoplastic analysis of second order, the
unless it is demonstrated that the stresses acting, with the combinations of actions of calculation,
as 4.7, even if including the residual stresses do not exceed the yield strength
steel in any cross section.
4.8.3.1.4 Submitted to vertical and horizontal forces, structures moving horizontally.
Global second order effects, also called P- effects are the answers
Page 25
arising from horizontal displacements on the ends of the bars (rotations of
ropes), which are obtained by establishing equilibrium in the deformed configuration
structure represented by the polygon defined by the strings of the various bars.
4.8.3.1.5 The local second order effects, also called P- effects are the answers
resulting displacement of the deformed configuration of the structure of each bar
subject to the normal force in relation to the position of the respective string.
4.8.3.2 Structures little too sensitive to horizontal displacements
4.8.3.2.1 The structure is considered to be very sensitive to horizontal displacements are, in all
their floors, the coefficient B
2Given by the following expression, not exceed 1.1:
B =
2
1
1-
N
Sd
oh
h H
Sd
Where:
N
is the sum of the normal forces applicants calculation across all pillars and
Sd
resistant to vertical loads other elements (including the pillars and other elements that
not belong to the system resistant to horizontal forces), considered on the floor;
is the horizontal relative displacement (between floors);
oh
H is the sum of all horizontal forces producing displacement calculation
Sd
horizontal on the floor considered;
h is the height from the floor (wheelbase beams).
4.8.3.2.2 The structure is considered very sensitive to horizontal displacements are in the
least one of his stories, the coefficient B
2 is greater than 1.1.
4.8.3.3 Analysis estimated second order
4.8.3.3.1 The rigorous elastic second-order analysis, depending on the sensitivity of the structure
25
the
horizontal
displacements
can be replaced
by an analysis
taking
into
account
the effects
of initial imperfections
in accordance
withestimated,
4.8.4, with
the following
rules:
- Insensitive to the horizontal displacements global structures for secondary
order can be neglected and the local second-order effects should be
considered a simplified form as 4.8.3.3.2;
- In very sensitive to horizontal displacements structures with the highest coefficient B
taking all floors not exceeding 1.3, the second global and local effects
order can be considered a simplified form as 4.8.3.3.3.
2,
4.8.3.3.2 In some structures sensitive to horizontal displacements, the bending moment

requestor calculation, M SdIncluding the local second-order effects, can be determined
by:
Page 26
26

M=
Sd
B M
0 Sd1
Where:
B0 is a coefficient given by:
C
m 1 If the requester normal force calculation on the bar, N
N
1 - Sd
N
and
compression;
B =
0
B = 1If the normal force on the bar requesting calculation, N

0
Sd, Is the
Sd, For traction.
N is the normal force of elastic buckling of the bar in the plane considered, calculated
and
based on their buckling length, according to 4.8.2;
Cm is an equivalence of moments, given by:
- If no transverse forces between the ends of the bar in the plane
bending:
C
= 060 - 040
M
M
1
2
being M M the ratio between the smallest and the largest bending moments of
1
2
applicants in calculating the bending plane, the supported ends of the bar,
taken as positive when the curvature and moments cause reverse
cause negative when a single curve;
- If lateral forces between the ends of the bar in the plane
bending, the value of Cm should be determined by rational analysis or be taken
in the case of 0.85 bar with both ends embedded and 1.0
in other cases.
M Sd 1requestor is the bending moment calculation at bar, obtained by structural analysis
elastic first order.
The other internal forces to be used in the verification of ultimate limit states can
be those obtained directly by first-order elastic analysis.
4.8.3.3.3 In very sensitive to horizontal displacements structures with the highest coefficient B
not more than 1.3, a simplified solution for the assessment of the overall effect of second
order consists in determining the internal forces based on elastic analysis
first order, multiplying the actions that cause horizontal displacements of the
found by combining 0.95 times higher B
obtained for normal forces and
2. The values
cutting shall be used in the verification of ultimate limit states, but additionally the
requestor bending moment calculation to be used must also include the local effects of
second order, is given by:
Page 27
M=
Sd
27
B M
0 Sd2
Where:
B0 should be determined as 4.8.3.3.2;
M Sd, requestor
is the bending moment calculation obtained from the above analysis.
2
4.8.3.3.4 In very sensitive to horizontal displacements structures with the highest coefficient B
greater than 1.3, considering all the floors, the only option allowed in place of the analysis
elastic rigorous second order is the use of the approximate analysis described in 4.8.3.4.
4.8.3.4 Analysis approximate second order

4.8.3.4.1 Annex V procedures are presented to approximate elastic analysis
second order, which can be used for any larger value of the coefficient B
considering all floors of the structure, even when it exceeds 1.3, and that
generally provide more accurate results than those obtained by the analysis described in estimated
4.8.3.3.
4.8.3.4.2 Other procedures for approximate elastic second-order analysis can be
used provided they lead to accurate results equivalent to the procedures of
Annex V.
4.8.4 Consideration of initial imperfections of the structure as a whole
4.8.4.1 The effect of initial imperfections of the structure as a whole may be taken into account
directly in the analysis by considering an equivalent geometric imperfection in
form of an initial displacement between floors 200
h
, Where h floor height (distance
wheelbase beams), accumulated over the height of the building. It is also admitted consider
it through the simplified procedure of notional forces given in 4.8.4.2.
4.8.4.2 The effect of initial imperfections of the structure can be taken into account by
application on each floor of the structure, a fictitious horizontal force called Force
notional, taken equal to 0.5% of the sum of normal forces applicants calculation in all
pillars and other elements resistant to vertical loads, considered on the floor. This force
notional should be considered acting in all combinations of shares used for calculating
the calculation of the structure. However, to avoid an overly conservative condition,
allows himself not consider it in combinations that work forces due to wind, ie
can consider it only for the combination of actions that act only in calculating actions
Direct permanent and result from the use and occupation of the building (see 4.7.2.1). It is not
necessary to consider them in the calculation of the horizontal support reactions.
2,
4.8.4.3 The effect of initial imperfections is to be applied in all horizontal directions

relevant, but only one at a time (considering both directions). The possible
torsional effects must also be considered.
4.8.4.4 Allows the analysis of the structure without directly considering the effect of imperfections
initials, if the requirements of 4.8.2.2.1 are met for braced structures and
4.8.2.3.1 for non-braced structures.
Page 28
28
4.8.5 Strength and stiffness of containments

4.8.5.1 General
4.8.5.1.1 The following requirements relate to minimum resistance and stiffness that
side retainers must have in order to be effective, so that, for example, bars
compressed can be calculated considering the buckling length equal to the distance
between the points at which these contentions are present. One should strive to put
perpendicular to the bar retainers; resistance (force or moment) and stiffness (force per
displacement unit time or per unit of rotation) sloping or containments
diagonals should be adjusted to the angle of inclination. The evaluation of the rigidity provided
the retainers must include its dimensions and geometric properties as well as the effects
links and anchor details.
4.8.5.1.2 Two types of containment, relative and nodal are considered. The restraint on
controlling the motion of a point contained in contained relation to adjacent points, while
Specifically containing the nodal point movement control contained no interaction
contained with the adjacent points (1 illustrates the two types of restraint bars
compressed and flexed). The strength and stiffness provided by the stability analysis of
restraint should not be less than the required limits.
N
h
Sum
Diagonal
N
N
Relative
N
Nodal
a) Containment in compressed bars
Relative
Nodal
b) Containment flexed in bars

Figure 1 - Types of containment
4.8.5.2 Floors with diagonal bracing panels or
In structures in which the lateral stability is ensured by diagonal bracing,
shear walls or equivalent means, the tensile shear strength and
Page 29
stiffness necessary for stability of these systems on each floor, are given, respectively,
by:
P
br
br
= 0004 N
=
Sd
2 N
r
Sd
h
Where:
is the weighting coefficient of rigidity equal to 1.35;
r
N is the sum of the normal forces requesters calculate the pillars and other
Sd
resistant elements to vertical forces considered the floor;
h is the height from the floor, making wheelbase beams.
These stability requirements should be combined with those related to forces and
Side other sources, such as wind movements.
4.8.5.3 Pillars
4.8.5.3.1 A single pillar can be contained in intermediate points along its
long and contentions relative or nodal.
4.8.5.3.2 The required strength and stiffness of the restraints on are given,
respectively, by:
P=
br
br
0004 N
=
Sd
2 N
r Sd
L
b
Where:
r
NSdrequestor is the normal force calculation on the pillar;
Lb is the distance from contention, observing the provisions in 4.8.5.3.4.
4.8.5.3.3 The strength and rigidity necessary nodal restraints, when these are
equally spaced, are given respectively by:
P=
001 N
29
br
Sd
8 N
= r Sd
br
L
b
where NSd, r andbLare defined in 4.8.5.3.2.
Page 30
30
4.8.5.3.4 When the distance between the points of restraint is smaller than L
Unlocked maximum length that allows the pillar resists normal force requestor
calculation of the buckling coefficient k = 1.00, can take L
q, Where L q is
b equal to Lq.
4.8.5.4 Beams
4.8.5.4.1 The contentions of a beam shall prevent the relative displacement of the top tables
and bottom. Lateral stability of beams must be provided to prevent the restraint
lateral displacement (translational containment), torsion (twisting restraint) or
combination of the two movements. Bars subjected to bending with reverse curvature,
inflection point can not be considered by itself as a restraint.
4.8.5.4.2 The contentions of translation can be relative or nodal and should be fixed
near the compressed table. Additionally, the balance beams, a contention in
end without support should be set close to the pulled table. Contentions translational
must be fixed near both tables when located in the vicinity of the point
inflection in beams subjected to reverse curvature.
4.8.5.4.3 The required strength and stiffness of contention for translation are given,
respectively, by:
P=
br
br
0008
C
Sd d
h
the
4 M C
r Sd d
L h
b the
Where:
r
M Sdis the bending moment calculation requestor;
hthe
is the distance between the centroid of the tables;
Cd is a coefficient equal to 1.00, except for containment located in the vicinity of the point
tipping in bars subjected to bending reverse camber, should be taken when
equal to 2.00;
Lb is the distance between restraints (length unlocked), observing the provisions in
4.8.5.4.5.
4.8.5.4.4 The required strength and stiffness of contention nodal translation are given,
respectively, by:
P=
br
002
C
Sd d
h the
Page 31
br
31
10 M C
r Sd d
L h
b the
where MSdC dH the

, r andbLare defined in 4.8.5.4.3.
4.8.5.4.5 When the distance between the points of restraint is smaller than L
unlocked maximum length which allows the beam to resist the bending moment requester
calculation, one can take G equal to L .
b
q
q, Where L q is
4.8.5.4.6 contentions torsional nodal or may be continuous along the length of the
beam. Such contentions may be fixed in any position of the cross section, not
needing to stay near the compressed table.
4.8.5.4.7 The contentions of nodal twist must have a connection with the beam capable of supporting the
bending moment, M br, And a minimum stiffness gantry or diaphragm,
Tb, Whose values,
respectively, are:
0024 M
Sd
nC L
b b
M=
br
Tb
1-
sec
Where:
M SdandbLare defined in 4.8.5.4.3;
L is the span of the beam;
n is the number of nodal points of contention within the range;
C is a modification factor defined in 5.4.2.5 and 5.4.2.6;
b
is the stiffness of the containment excluding the distortion of the beam web, given by:
T
=
T
LM2
r
Sd
nE I C2
y b
2 4
sec is the stiffness of the beam web distortion, including the effect of stiffeners
Cross the soul, if any, given by:
sec
t b3
3 3 E 1 5,h t 3
thew + s s
h
12
12
the

r
E is the modulus of elasticity of steel;
Page 32
32

I y is the moment of inertia of the beam about the axis situated in the bending plane;
hthe
is the distance between the centroid of the tables;
t wis the thickness of the beam web;
t s is the thickness of the stiffener;
bs the width of the stiffener is located on one side (using twice the width of the stiffener
for pairs of stiffeners).
If secis less than

T, Tb will be negative, indicating that the containment torsion beam is not
effective due to inadequate rigidity to the distortion of the beam web.
When the stiffener is required, it must be extended to the total height of the bar
contained and must be fixed to the table if containment torsion is also fixed to the table.
Alternatively, the stiffener is allowed to interrupt a distance equal to
any table of the beam that is not directly attached to the containment twist. When the
spacing of the points of restraint is smaller than L
q, Then L b may be taken equal to L
4.8.5.4.8 For the contentions of continuous torque must be used the same expressions given
in 4.8.5.4.7, taking n
L equal to 1.00 times and the rigidity per unit length,
and rigidity to the distortion of the soul, beam As:
sec
3 3Et3
w
sec 12 h
the
=
4.9 Structural Integrity

4.9.1 The structural design, in addition to providing a framework capable of meeting the limit states
past and the intended period of use for the building lifespan, should allow the
manufacturing, shipping, handling and assembly of the structure are performed so
proper and safe working condition. It must also take into account the need to
future maintenance, demolition, recycling and reuse of materials.
4.9.2 The basic anatomy of the structure by which actions are transmitted to the foundations must be
clearly defined. Any structure characteristics that influence the stability
Global must be identified and properly considered in the design. Each part of a building
between expansion joints should be treated as an isolated building.
4.9.3 The structure must be designed as a three-dimensional entity, must be robust and
stable under normal load conditions and should not occur in the event that one
accident or be used inappropriately, suffering disproportionate damage to their causes. In
absence of specific sophisticated studies should be followed given prescriptions
4.9.4 to 4.9.8.
4.9.4 Each pillar of a building shall be effectively locked by means of struts (retainers)
at least two horizontal directions, preferably orthogonal at each level supported by
this pillar, including roofing, according to Figure 2.
t4 of
w
q.
Page 33
33
4.9.5 Continuous lines of struts should be placed as close as possible to the edges of the
floor or roof line and each pillar, and reentrant corners anchors should be
and connected to the structure according to Figure 2.
Anchors of the pillars
Anchors edge
Reentrant corner
Anchor for Dike
the reentrant corner
Anchors edge
The
Anchor for containment
The abutment
Anchors edge
Beams not used as anchors
Figure 2 - Example of bracing the pillars of a building

4.9.6 The horizontal struts may consist of steel profiles, including those used
for other purposes, such as floor joists and hedge shears, or the reinforcement of slabs
properly connected to the steel frame.
4.9.7 The horizontal struts and their connections must be compatible with the other
elements of the structure to which they belong and be sized for shares calculation and
also to withstand a pulling force calculation, which should not be added to other
actions, at least 2% of the requesting force calculation on the pillar or 75 kN, whichever is greater. On
case covers without concrete slabs, the struts of the pillars and their end
their connections shall be designed for the actions of calculation and also to support
a compressive force calculation, which should not be added to other actions, at least
75 kN. In addition, the struts must meet the applicable requirements given in 4.8.5.
4.9.8 In buildings with multiple floors, pillars of the amendments should be able to withstand
a force corresponding to the larger reaction of traction calculation, obtained from the combination of load
permanent and overhead applied on the pillar of a floor located between the amendment in
consideration and positioned immediately below the seam.
5 Specific conditions for the design of steel elements
5.1 Relations width / thickness on tablets elements of steel profiles
5.1.1 Classification of cross sections
5.1.1.1 Depending on the value of the slenderness of the compressed components in relation to p andr(To see
5.1.1.2), respectively slenderness parameter corresponding to the lamination and parameter
slenderness corresponding to the onset of yield, the cross sections are classified into:
Page 34
34

- Compact: sections tablets whose elements have not exceed the slenderness
parameter and whose tables are connected continuously to the soul or souls (see 5.1.1.3);
p
- Semicompactas: sections that have one or more elements tablets exceeding the
parameter pBut not the parameter r (See 5.1.1.4);
- Slender: sections that have one or more elements tablets exceeding the
parameter r (See 5.1.1.5).
5.1.1.2 The slenderness of compressed elements is defined in 5.1.2 and the parameters of slenderness
andrare provided for different request types along this Standard.
5.1.1.3 Compact sections are capable of achieving a stress distribution "fully

Plastic "and have a great rotation before the occurrence of local buckling. These sections
are suitable for cosmetic analysis, but should, for this type of analysis, having a shaft
symmetry in the plane of loading when subjected to bending, and be doubly symmetric
when subjected to normal compression forces.
5.1.1.4 semicompactas In sections, the tablets reach the resistance elements
runoff before local buckling occurs, but not resist inelastic local buckling
the intensity of tension required to achieve "fully plastic" distributing
strains.
5.1.1.5 In the sections slender elements tablets before flambam resistance
flow is achieved.
5.1.2 Types and slenderness of the component elements
5.1.2.1 For the purposes of local buckling, the elements of the cross sections
usual, except the circular tubular sections are classified into AA when have two
linked longitudinal edges, and AL, when they have only one longitudinal edge
bound.
5.1.2.2 The slenderness of the component elements of the cross section is defined by the relationship between
width and thickness (ratio
b). t /
5.1.2.3 The width (b) of some of the most common AA elements should be taken as follows:
a) for the souls of sections I, H or U-rolled, the free distance between the two tables less
rays of agreement between table and soul;
b) for the souls of sections I, H, U or welded coffin, the free distance between tables;
c) for welded sections coffin tables, the free distance between the inner faces of the souls;
d) to souls rectangular tubular sections and tables, the length of the flat part of the
element;
e) for plates, the distance between the parallel lines of fasteners or welding.
5.1.2.4 The width of some of the most common elements AL should be taken as follows:
Page 35
35
a) sections of tables for I, H and T, half of the total width of the table;
b) to flaps and gussets U sections tables, the total width of the element;
c) for plates, the distance from the free edge to the first row of bolts or welding;
d) for the souls of sections T, the total height of the cross section, including the height of the soul and the
thickness table.
5.2 prismatic bars subjected to normal traction force
5.2.1 General
5.2.1.1 This subsection applies to prismatic bars subjected to normal traction force
caused by static actions, including bars linked by pins and lugs and round bars with
Threaded ends.
5.2.1.2 In the design, the condition must be met:
N
TSd
TRd
Where:
N
is the normal force of requesting traction calculation, determined from the
t, Sd
combinations of actions given in 4.7.2;
Nt, Rdis the normal force of sturdy traction calculation, determined according to 5.2.2, 5.2.6 or
5.2.7, whichever is applicable.
The condition specified in 5.2.8 should still be met, relating to the maximum value of
slenderness ratio and, in the case of a bar composed, must be met given the rules
in 5.2.9.
5.2.2 sturdy Normal force calculation
The normal force resistant traction calculation, N
To be used in the design, except
t, Rd
for round bars with threaded ends and bars linked by pins, is the smallest of
values
obtained, considering the limit states for disposal of gross section and
Liquid break section according to the expressions given below:
a) for the disposal of the gross section
N
TRd
The f
g y
b) to break the net section

N
Where:
Page 36
TRd
The f
andu
36

is the weighting coefficient of resistance, equal to 1.10 for disposing of gross section
and 1.35 for net section rupture;
The
the bar;
g is the gross cross-sectional area of
The
is the effective net area of
cross section, given bar as 5.2.3;
and
f y is the yield strength of steel;
f u is the tensile strength of steel.
5.2.3 Effective Net Area

The effective net area of
a bar, The
Is given by:
and
A = C The
and t n
Where:
The
n is the net area, as determined Bar 5.2.4;
Ct is a reduction coefficient of net area determined according to 5.2.5.
5.2.4 Net Area
5.2.4.1 In regions with holes, made
for switching or for any other purpose, the area
Net, The , A bar is the sum of the thickness of the liquid products width of each
n
element, calculated as follows:
a) bolted to the width of the holes must be considered greater than 2.0 mm
nominal size of these holes, defined in 6.3.5, perpendicular to the direction of the force
applied;
b) if a series of holes distributed transversely to the axis of the bar in
to this axis diagonal or zigzag, the net width of that part of the bar shall be
calculated by deducting from the gross width the sum of the widths of all the holes in the chain, and
adding to each line connecting the two holes, the amount
s 2 4 g , And Mon
respectively, the longitudinal and transverse spacings (feedback) between these two
holes;
c) the net width of that critical part of the bar will be obtained by the chain holes
gives the least net widths for the different possibilities of lines
break;
d) for angles, feedback g holes in opposite flaps should be considered equal to
sum of jigs, measured from the edge of the ledge, subtracted from its thickness;
e) in determining the net section area comprising welds or welds buffer
Fillet holes in the area of
the weld metal must be discarded.
Page 37
5.2.4.2 In areas where there are no holes, the net area, A
37
, Should be taken equal to the area
gross cross section, The
g.
5.2.5 Reduction Coefficient

5.2.5.1 The reduction coefficient of net area, C
t, Bars with cross sections
constituted by more than one rectangular element, including rectangular tubular sections has
the following values:
a) when the traction force is transmitted directly to each of the elements of
cross section of the bar, by welds or bolts:
C = 100
t
b) when the traction force is transmitted only by only by bolts or welds
Longitudinal or by a combination of longitudinal and transversal welds to
some, but not all, elements of the cross section of the bar (should, however, be
used 0.90 as the upper limit and lower limit 0.75):
and
C =1- c
t
l
c
Where (Figure 3):
and
c is the eccentricity of the bond, equal to the distance from the center of gravity of the bar, L,
the shear plane of the connection (in profiles with a plane of symmetry, the connection
should be symmetrical in relation to this plane are considered and two separate bars and
symmetric, each related to a shear plane of the connection, for
example, two T sections in case I or H profiles linked the tables);
l cIn the welded joints, the length of the link is equal to the length of
welding and bolted in is the distance from first to last screw thread
drilling with larger screws, toward the normal force;
and
c
Higher T
G
and
c
lc
Lower T
lc
Figure 3 - Illustration of values

and
and in cross sections consisting of
c lc
flat elements
c) when the traction force is transmitted only by transverse welds:
Page 38
38

The
c
C=
t The
g
Center of gravity
higher T
Center of gravity
lower T
and
c
Where:
The
the connected elements;
c is the cross-sectional area of
The
the bar.
g gross cross-sectional area of
t, The flat plates when the traction force
is transmitted only by longitudinal welds along both its edges, has
following values:
C = 100 To
t
C = 087 To
t
2b > l
C = 075 To
t
1 5,b > l b
w
2b
w
1 5,b
Where:
l w is the length of the weld;
b is the plate width (distance between the welds located on both edges).
Circular has the following values:
t, Bars with tubular cross sections
a)
when the traction force is transmitted almost uniformly throughout
the cross section, by welds or bolts:
C = 100
t
b)
when the traction force is transmitted to only a portion of the cross section,
as in the situation shown in Figure 4, the procedure should be used as in b)
of 5.2.5.1.
Page 39
39
Centre of gravity
semi-circle top
and
c
and
c
lc
Centre of gravity
lower semi-circle
Figure 4 - Illustration of transmission of force to the tubular part of circular cross section
5.2.6 bars connected by pin and lugs
5.2.6.1 bars connected by pin
5.2.6.1.1 The normal force resistant traction calculation of a bar connected by pin except
eyebolts, is the lowest value considering the following limit states:
a) disposing of gross section tensile as 5.2.2;
b) pressure resistance of the projected contact area of
the pin, as 6.6.1;
c) rupture of the net section tensile
N
TRd
2 bt f
f u
d) rupture of the net section shear

N
TRd
060 The f
sf u
with The = t2 to+( d / ) 2

sf
p
Where:
is the weighting coefficient of resistance equal to 1.35;
t is the thickness of the plate connected by the pin;
bf is an effective width equal to
t2 +16 mm But not more than the distance from the edge of
hole to the nearest edge of the part measured in the direction perpendicular to the normal force
acting;
a is the shortest distance from the edge of the hole to the end of the bar measured in the direction parallel to the
acting normal force;
Page 40
40

dp is the diameter of the pin;
f u is the tensile strength tensile steel.
5.2.6.1.2 the following requirements (Figure 5) must be met:
- The pin
hole must be
in the
middle distance between the edges of the bar toward
acting
perpendicular
to located
the normal
force;
- When the pin's function also prevent relative movement between the parties
connected, its diameter d
pIt can be a maximum of 1.0 mm smaller than the hole, d
h;
- The length of the plate beyond the edge of the hole can not be smaller than
2 b(
and the distance can not be less than
133 b
+d )
p
(Bf , Dp and defined in 5.2.6.1.1);
- Corner bar, in addition to the through hole of the pin can be cut at angles
45 to the longitudinal axis, provided that the net cross-sectional area between the edge of
hole and the cut edge, perpendicular to the shear plane, is not less than that
required beyond the edge of the hole, parallel to the axis of the workpiece.
B 2f + D
p
t
a 1.33 fb
The
bf
b
2
dh
N
b
2
bf
Section AA
The
dp
45
1.33 b
f
Figure 5 - Plaque connected by pin

5.2.6.2 Eyelets
The eyebolts are pieces for pin connections (Figure 6), which must meet the following
requirements:
-
have uniform thickness without additional reinforcement in the area of

passage of the pin;
the head should be circular, concentric with the through hole pin contour;
Page 41
41
the radius of the agreement between the head and the body of the ring (R) must be equal to or
larger than the outside diameter of the eye (D) head;
-
the plate thickness of the body of the lug (t) can not be less than 13 mm;
distance from the edge of the hole to the edge of the plate in the direction perpendicular to the force
applied must be greater than
2 3 /the width of the ring body;
-
the pin diameter may not be less than
7 8 / the width of the ring body, and
off the pin in the hole, d hCan not be greater than 1.0 mm.
Met these requirements, the normal force of sturdy traction calculation, N
determined according to 5.2.2, for the ultimate limit state flow of gross section, with an
gross area equal to the width of the body of the grommet, b, the thickness t (Figure 6).
, Must be
t, Rd
RD
t 13 mm
2 b
3
The
N
Section AA
dp dh dp+ 1.0 mm
dp 7
8b
2 b
3
The
Figure 6 - Eyelet
5.2.7 Round bars with threaded ends
5.2.7.1 The normal force resistant traction calculation, N
, The round bars with
t, Rd
threaded ends, it is the smallest of the values
considering the limit states of
disposing of gross section and break the threaded part. Such values
should be obtained from
According to 5.2.2) and 6.3.3.2, respectively.
5.2.8 Index slenderness limit
The slenderness ratio of tensile bars,
K L r , Except rods round bars
pre-tensioned or other bars that have been pre-assembled with voltage must be less than or
equal to 300.
5.2.9 Bars composite tensile
The composite tensile bars shall conform to the following rules (Figure 7):
a) the longitudinal spacing between bolts or intermittent fillet welds connecting
a plaque with a profile, or two plates in contact, can not be greater than:
Page 42
42

- 24 or
t greater than 300 mm, for bars made with unpainted resistant steel
atmospheric corrosion or painted bars;
- 14 or
t greater than 180 mm, for bars made with unpainted steel not
Resistant to atmospheric corrosion;
b) the longitudinal spacing between bolts or intermittent welds connecting two or
more contact sections can not be longer than 600 mm;
c) profiles or plates, separated from each other by a distance equal to the thickness of
Spacer plates must be interconnected through these spacer plates, so
the
largest
slenderness ratio of any profile or sheet between these connections, not
exceed
300;
d) can be used in the open faces continuous sheets with access openings or
intermittent connecting plates, the latter being:
a.
should have a length equal to or greater than 3

bolts or welds that connect to the main truss members;
The distance between two lines
b.
thickness should be less than

screws or welding;
c.
should be connected to the main components by screws or welds

intermittent longitudinal distance below or equal to 150 mm;
d.
should be spaced so that the greater spacing between plates

connection must be such that the slenderness ratio greater
l r / for each component
principal, this range is not more than 300.
/1
50 the distance between lines
Page 43
N
r 5.2.9-a
Ve
43
N
lete
phi
and
d
600mm
Screws
300
Screws
max
/(LR)
3
2b /intermittent
n
mm
150
I weld
b
300
/max
(LR)
D
lete
phi
and
Thed B
The
intermittent
n
I weld
600mm
r 5.2.9-a
Ve
lete
andl
B phi
d
mm
150
intermittent
n
I weldC
2b
3
/ Screws
rMin
Section AA
DC Court
DD cut
BB Cut
Figure 7 - composite tensile bars
5.3 prismatic bars subjected to normal compressive force

5.3.1 General
5.3.1.1 This subsection applies to prismatic bars subjected to the normal force
compression caused by static actions.
5.3.1.2 In the design, the condition must be met:
N
C
Sd
CRd
Where:
Nc, Sdis the normal force of requesting compression calculation, determined from the
combinations of actions given in 4.7.2;
Page 44
44

Nc, Ris the normal force resistant compression calculation, determined as 5.3.2.
The condition specified in 5.3.5 should still be met, relating to the maximum value of
slenderness ratio and, in the case of a bar composed, must be met given the rules
in 5.3.6.
5.3.2 sturdy Normal force calculation
The normal force resistant compression calculation, N
c, R, A bar, considering the states
ultimate limits of instability by bending, torsional or flexo-torsion and local buckling,
should be determined by the expression:
N
CRd
Q Thef
g y
b/50
Where:
is the weighting coefficient of resistance to compression, equal to 1.10;
is the factor associated with resistance to compression reduction, given in 5.3.3;
Q is the local buckling coefficient, whose value should be obtained from Annex E;
The
the bar;
g is the gross cross-sectional area of
f y is the yield strength of the steel.
5.3.3 Reduction factor
5.3.3.1 The reduction factor associated with resistance to compression, , depends on the curve
sizing the compression (a, b, c or d), which is the type of cross section, the
mode instability and the axis for which instability occurs, according to
. Table 3 Their values
can be obtained from figure 8 and in Table 4 or determined by:
1
+ ( 2 - 2 )
the
1 0,
With
(
)
= 0 5, 1 +
[ - 0 2 + 2]
the
the
where is related to the scaling coefficient curve compression and
reduced slenderness, given respectively in 5.3.3.2 and 5.3.3.3.
theis the index
5.3.3.2 The coefficient , in cases of instability due to bending is equal to 0.21, 0.34, 0.49 and 0.76,
curves respectively for sizing compression.
In cases of instability by twisting or flexion-torsion, should always be taken equal to 0.34
(Ie, the curve b to be used).
Page 45
5.3.3.3 The reduced slenderness ratio,
=
the
QN
N
For compressed bars is given by:

the
pl
and
Where:
Q is the local buckling coefficient obtained from Annex E;
Np is the flow corresponding to the cross section normal force, equal to the product
l
The f (A is the gross cross-sectional area and f
the yield strength of steel);
y
g y g
Nand
is the normal force of elastic buckling, obtained as Annex K, depending on
buckling length (see 5.3.4).
5.3.4 Length of buckling
45
The buckling coefficient K allows to obtain the buckling length of the rod,
should be determined in accordance with 4.8.
Page 46
46

Table 3 - Curves sizing Compressive instability due to bending
Cross section
Instability
around the
axis
3)
Tubular sections
No soldering
longitudinal
the
Any
With solder
longitudinal
Sections welded coffin
tf
tw
b
d t / < 30
w
Other cases
Sections H and I rolled

y
b t / < 30
f
Welds great
thickness
to>( 0 t5 )
f
d b>
/ 12
t 40 mm
f
Curve 1) 4)
Any
Any
x- x
the
y- y
tf
d x
40 < t 100 mm
f
x
y
b
d b
/ 12
t 100 mm
f
t > 100 mm
f
Sections I and welded H

y
t1
x
t1 x
t2
x
x- x
y- y
x- x
b
c
b
y- y
Any
t 40 mm
i
(I = 1 and 2)
x- x
b 2)
y- y
c 2)
t > 40 mm
i
(I = 1 or 2)
x- x
c 2)
y- y
d 2)
Sections U, T and solid laminated

Any
Any
L sections (angles) rolled
NOTES:
1)In cases of instability by twisting or flexion-torsion, it should be used to curve b.
2)If the soldier profile is manufactured by depositing weld metal plates cut with a torch, can be used to
curve b for any instability about the axis.
3)Sections not included in the table are classified analogously.
4)For compressed composite bars, subject to the limitations of 5.3.6 should be adopted curve c for instability
relative to the axis that does not intersect the major components profiles.
Page 47
47
1,000
0,900
the
0,800
0,700
0,600
0,500
0,400
0,300
0,200
0,100
0.000
0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00
the
Figure 8 - dimensioning the compression curves (see Table 3)
Table 4a - Values
of for the curve ( = 0.21)
the
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
0.00
1,000
1,000
1,000
0,977
0,953
0.924
0,890
0,848
0,796
0,734
0.666
0.596
0,530
0,470
0,418
0,372
0,333
0,299
0,270
0,245
0,223
0,204
0,187
0,172
0,159
0,147
0.136
0,127
0,118
0,111
0,104
0.01
1,000
1,000
0,998
0.975
0,950
0.921
0,886
0,843
0,790
0,727
0,659
0,589
0,524
0,465
0,413
0,368
0,330
0,296
0,268
0,243
0,221
0,202
0,185
0,170
0,157
0,146
0,135
0,126
0,117
0,110
-
0.02
1,000
1,000
0,996
0,973
0,947
0.918
0,882
0.838
0,784
0,721
0,652
0,582
0,518
0,459
0,408
0,364
0,326
0,293
0,265
0,240
0,219
0,200
0,184
0,169
0,156
0,145
0.134
0,125
0,117
0,109
-
0.03
1,000
1,000
0,993
0,970
0,945
0,915
0,878
0,833
0,778
0,714
0,645
0,576
0,511
0.454
0,404
0.360
0,323
0,290
0,262
0,238
0,217
0,198
0,182
0,168
0,155
0,143
0,133
0,124
0,116
0,108
-
0.04
1,000
1,000
0.991
0,968
0.942
0,911
0,874
0,828
0,772
0,707
0,638
0,569
0,505
0,448
0,399
0,356
0,319
0,287
0,260
0,236
0,215
0,197
0,180
0,166
0,154
0,142
0,132
0,123
0,115
0,108
-
0.05
1,000
1,000
0,989
0,966
0.939
0,908
0,870
0,823
0,766
0,700
0,631
0,562
0,499
0,443
0,394
0,352
0,316
0,284
0,257
0,234
0,213
0,195
0,179
0,165
0,152
0,141
0,131
0,122
0,114
0,107
-
0.06
1,000
1,000
0,987
0,963
0,936
0,905
0,866
0,818
0,760
0,693
0,624
0,556
0.493
0,438
0,390
0,348
0,312
0,281
0,255
0,231
0,211
0,193
0,178
0,164
0,151
0,140
0,130
0,122
0,114
0,106
-
0.07
1,000
1,000
0,984
0,961
0.933
0.901
0,861
0,812
0,753
0,686
0.617
0.549
0,487
0,433
0,385
0.344
0,309
0,279
0,252
0,229
0,209
0,192
0,176
0,162
0,150
0,139
0,129
0,121
0,113
0,106
-
0.08
1,000
1,000
0,982
0.958
0,930
0,897
0,857
0,807
0.747
0,680
0,610
0.543
0,482
0,428
0,381
0,341
0,306
0,276
0,250
0.227
0,207
0,190
0,175
0,161
0,149
0,138
0,129
0,120
0,112
0,105
-
0.09
1,000
1,000
0,980
0,955
0,927
0,894
0,852
0.801
0,740
0,673
0,603
0.536
0.476
0,423
0,377
0,337
0,303
0,273
0,247
0,225
0,205
0,188
0,173
0,160
0,148
0,137
0,128
0,119
0,111
0,104
-
the
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
0.07
1,000
1,000
0.975
0,938
0,897
0,852
0,800
0,743
0,680
0.616
0,553
0,495
0.442
0,395
0,354
0,318
0,287
0,259
0,236
0,215
0,197
0,181
0,167
0,154
0,143
0,133
0,124
0,115
0,108
0,101
0.08
1,000
1,000
0,971
0,934
0,893
0,847
0,795
0.737
0,674
0,610
0,547
0,489
0,437
0,390
0,350
0,314
0,284
0,257
0,234
0,213
0,195
0,179
0,165
0,153
0,142
0,132
0,123
0,115
0,107
0,101
0.09
1,000
1,000
0,968
0,930
0,889
0,842
0,789
0.731
0,668
0,603
0.541
0,484
0,432
0.386
0,346
0,311
0,281
0,255
0,231
0,211
0,194
0,178
0,164
0,152
0,141
0,131
0,122
0,114
0,107
0,100
the
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Page 48
48

Table 4b - Values
of for curve b ( = 0.34)
the
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
0.00
1,000
1,000
1,000
0,964
0.926
0,884
0.837
0,784
0,724
0,661
0,597
0.535
0,478
0,427
0,382
0,342
0,308
0,278
0,252
0,229
0,209
0,192
0,176
0,163
0,151
0,140
0,130
0,121
0,113
0,106
0.01
1,000
1,000
0,996
0,960
0.922
0,880
0,832
0,778
0,718
0,655
0,591
0,529
0.473
0,422
0,378
0,339
0,305
0,275
0,250
0.227
0,208
0,190
0,175
0,162
0,149
0,139
0,129
0,120
0,112
0,105
0.02
1,000
1,000
0,993
0,957
0.918
0,875
0,827
0,772
0,712
0,648
0,584
0,523
0,467
0,417
0,373
0,335
0,302
0,273
0,247
0,225
0,206
0,189
0,174
0,160
0,148
0,138
0,128
0,119
0,112
0,105
0.03
1,000
1,000
0,989
0,953
0,914
0,871
0,822
0,766
0,706
0,642
0,578
0,518
0,462
0,413
0.369
0,331
0,299
0,270
0,245
0,223
0,204
0,187
0,172
0,159
0,147
0,137
0,127
0,119
0,111
0,104
0.04
1,000
1,000
0,986
0,949
0,910
0,866
0,816
0,761
0.699
0,635
0,572
0,512
0,457
0,408
0,365
0,328
0,295
0,267
0,243
0,221
0,202
0,186
0,171
0,158
0,146
0.136
0,126
0,118
0,110
0,103
0.05
1,000
1,000
0,982
0,945
0.906
0,861
0,811
0,755
0,693
0,629
0,566
0,506
0.452
0,404
0,361
0,324
0,292
0,265
0,240
0,219
0,200
0,184
0,169
0,157
0,145
0,135
0,125
0,117
0,109
0,103
0.06
1,000
1,000
0,979
0.942
0.902
0,857
0.806
0.749
0,687
0.623
0,559
0,500
0,447
0,399
0,357
0,321
0,289
0,262
0,238
0,217
0,199
0,182
0,168
0,155
0,144
0.134
0,125
0,116
0,109
0,102
3.0
0,099
3.0
0.09
1,000
1,000
0.954
0.903
0.849
0,791
0.731
0,668
0,606
0,546
0,490
0,439
0,393
0,353
0,318
0,287
0,260
0,237
0,216
0,198
0,182
0,168
0,155
0,144
0,133
0,124
0,116
0,109
0,102
0,096
-
the
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
Table 4c - Values
of for curve c ( = 0.49)
the
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
0.00
1,000
1,000
1,000
0,949
0,897
0,843
0,785
0,725
0,662
0,600
0,540
0,484
0,434
0.389
0,349
0,315
0,284
0,258
0,235
0,214
0,196
0,180
0,166
0,154
0,143
0,132
0,123
0,115
0,108
0,101
0,095
0.01
1,000
1,000
0,995
0,944
0,892
0.837
0,779
0,718
0,656
0,594
0,534
0,479
0,429
0,385
0,346
0,311
0,281
0,255
0,232
0,212
0,195
0,179
0,165
0,153
0,141
0,132
0,123
0,115
0,107
0,101
-
0.02
1,000
1,000
0,990
0.939
0.887
0,832
0,773
0,712
0,650
0,588
0,528
0,474
0,424
0,380
0,342
0,308
0,279
0,253
0,230
0,210
0,193
0,177
0,164
0,151
0,140
0,131
0,122
0,114
0,107
0,100
-
0.03
1,000
1,000
0,985
0,934
0,881
0.826
0,767
0,706
0,643
0,582
0,523
0,469
0,420
0,376
0,338
0,305
0,276
0,250
0,228
0,209
0,191
0,176
0,162
0,150
0,139
0,130
0,121
0,113
0,106
0,099
-
0.04
1,000
1,000
0,980
0.929
0,876
0,820
0,761
0,700
0.637
0,575
0,517
0,463
0,415
0,372
0,335
0,302
0,273
0,248
0,226
0,207
0,190
0,174
0,161
0,149
0,138
0,129
0,120
0,112
0,105
0,099
-
0.05
1,000
1,000
0.975
0,923
0,871
0,815
0,755
0.694
0,631
0,569
0,511
0,458
0,411
0,368
0,331
0,299
0,271
0,246
0,224
0,205
0,188
0,173
0,160
0,148
0,137
0,128
0,119
0,111
0,104
0,098
-
0.06
1,000
1,000
0,969
0.918
0,865
0.809
0.749
0,687
0,625
0,563
0,506
0,453
0,406
0,364
0,328
0,296
0,268
0,243
0,222
0,203
0,186
0,172
0,159
0,147
0.136
0,127
0,118
0,111
0,104
0,097
-
0.07
1,000
1,000
0,964
0,913
0,860
0,803
0,743
0.681
0.618
0,558
0,500
0,448
0,402
0,361
0,324
0,293
0,265
0,241
0,220
0,201
0,185
0,170
0,157
0,146
0,135
0,126
0,118
0,110
0,103
0,097
-
0.08
1,000
1,000
0,959
0,908
0,854
0,797
0.737
0,675
0,612
0.552
0,495
0,443
0,397
0,357
0,321
0,290
0,263
0,239
0,218
0,200
0,183
0,169
0,156
0,145
0.134
0,125
0,117
0,109
0,102
0,096
-
Page 49
49
Table 4d - Values
of curve for d ( = 0.76)
the
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
0.00
1,000
1,000
1,000
0,923
0,850
0,779
0,710
0,643
0,580
0.521
0,467
0,419
0,376
0,339
0,306
0,277
0,251
0,229
0,209
0,192
0,177
0,163
0,151
0,140
0,130
0,121
0,113
0,106
0,100
0,094
0,088
0.01
1,000
1,000
0,992
0,916
0,843
0,772
0,703
0.637
0,574
0,515
0,462
0,414
0,372
0,335
0,302
0,274
0,249
0.227
0,207
0,190
0,175
0,162
0,150
0,139
0,129
0,121
0,113
0,106
0,099
0,093
-
0.02
1,000
1,000
0,984
0,909
0,836
0,765
0,696
0,630
0,568
0,510
0,457
0,410
0,368
0,332
0,299
0,271
0,247
0,225
0,206
0,189
0,174
0,160
0,149
0,138
0,128
0,120
0,112
0,105
0,098
0,093
-
0.03
1,000
1,000
0,977
0.901
0.829
0,758
0,690
0,624
0,562
0,504
0.452
0,406
0,364
0,328
0,296
0,269
0,244
0,223
0,204
0,187
0,172
0,159
0,147
0,137
0,127
0,119
0,111
0,104
0,098
0,092
-
0.04
1,000
1,000
0,969
0,894
0,822
0,751
0,683
0.617
0,556
0,499
0,447
0,401
0,361
0,325
0,293
0,266
0,242
0,221
0,202
0,186
0,171
0,158
0,146
0.136
0,127
0,118
0,110
0,104
0,097
0,091
-
0.05
1,000
1,000
0,961
0.887
0,815
0.744
0,676
0,611
0,550
0.493
0.442
0,397
0,357
0,321
0,291
0,263
0,240
0,219
0,200
0,184
0,170
0,157
0,145
0,135
0,126
0,117
0,110
0,103
0,097
0,091
-
0.06
1,000
1,000
0.954
0,879
0,808
0,738
0,670
0.605
0,544
0,488
0,438
0,393
0,353
0,318
0,288
0.261
0,237
0,217
0,199
0,183
0,168
0,156
0,144
0.134
0,125
0,116
0,109
0,102
0,096
0,090
-
0.07
1,000
1,000
0.946
0,872
0,800
0.731
0,663
0.598
0,538
0.483
0,433
0,388
0,349
0,315
0,285
0,258
0,235
0,215
0,197
0,181
0,167
0,154
0,143
0,133
0,124
0,116
0,108
0,102
0,095
0,090
-
0.08
1,000
1,000
0,938
0,865
0,793
0,724
0,656
0.592
0.532
0,477
0,428
0,384
0,346
0,312
0,282
0,256
0,233
0,213
0,195
0,180
0,166
0,153
0,142
0,132
0,123
0,115
0,108
0,101
0,095
0,089
-
0.09
1,000
1,000
0,931
0,858
0.786
0.717
0,650
0,586
0,526
0,472
0,423
0,380
0,342
0,309
0,279
0,254
0,231
0,211
0,194
0,178
0,164
0,152
0,141
0,131
0,122
0,114
0,107
0,100
0,094
0,089
-
the
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
5.3.5 Index slenderness limit

The slenderness ratio KL r For
/ compressed bars can not be greater than 200.
5.3.6 Composite Bars
5.3.6.1 Dimensioning
The composite bars compressed must be scaled obeying the subsections 5.3.1 to
5.3.5. However, the mode of instability involve producing deformations on
shear forces in the connecting elements of the components of these profiles bars, index
slendernessKL r / mode instability and bending of the bending mode
instability in flexion-torsion should be modified, assuming the following values:
a) if the connectors are connected to the bar profiles consisting of screws
with normal grip:
KL
r
=
m
the 2
r
the i
KL 2
r
b) if the connectors are connected to the bar profiles consisting of screws

prestressed or soldering:
Page 50
50

KL
r
=
m
KL 2
r
+ 082
the
(
h
)(
)
r2 2 ther 2
ib
ib
(
)
1 + h r2 2
ib
Where:
( KL / ) Ris the slenderness of the composite bar;
the
a is the distance between the connecting elements of the components of the composite bar profiles;
r i is the minimum radius of gyration of a component of the composite profile bar;
r ib is the radius of gyration of a component of the composite profile bar relative to its axis
main parallel to the axis of bending buckling of composite bar inertia;
h is the distance between the centers of gravity of the components of the composite profiles in bar
direction perpendicular to the axis of buckling.
5.3.6.2 Requirements for the design
5.3.6.2.1 Along the length of composite bars, the longitudinal spacing
intermittent welds or screws must be suitable for the transfer of requests
active.
Related to maximum spacing limitations and maximum distance between holes of a hole
the edges, see 6.3.9.
5.3.6.2.2 At the ends of composite rods compressed supported on base plates or
Machined surfaces,
all components
in contact
withwidth
each other
bescrew
connected by welding
Continuing
having a length
not less than
the largest
of themust
bar or
the longitudinal spacing can not exceed four diameters in length
not less than 1.5 times the greatest width of the bar.
5.3.6.2.3 In cases where the bar has composed the external profiles sheets, spacing
maximum can not exceed
0.75 t E f Or 305 mm, thickness ta of the outer sheet
y
thinner, when there screws in all longitudinal lines drilling or welding
intermittently along the edges of the components of the section. When bolts or welds
Intermittent are lagged, the maximum spacing on each line drilling or welding does not
can overcome
112 t E f , And ta thickness thinner outer plate can not be
y
greater than 460 mm.
5.3.6.2.4 Bars compressed composite of two or more profiles in touch with lost or
equal to the thickness of spacer plates must have links from these profiles at intervals
regular, so that the slenderness ratio
l r / any profile between two connections
adjacent, does not exceed 3/4 of the slenderness ratio of the composite bar unless
use more accurate to determine the resistance of the bar process. For each profile
component, the slenderness ratio should be calculated on your minimum radius of gyration.
5.3.6.2.5 The open faces of composite plates compressed bars or profiles should be
travejamento provided with lattice plates as well as at each end, and also
plates at intermediate positions of the bar if there is interruption travejamento. Such plates
Page 51
51
should extend as much as possible to the longitudinal sides of the bar. Furthermore, the plates
edge should have a length not less than the distance between the screws or
welds that connect to the main truss members. Plates in intermediate positions
should have a length not less than half that distance.
The thickness of the plates can not be less than 50
/1
welds connecting these plates to the main truss members.
the distance between lines of bolts or
In the case of bolted plates, the longitudinal spacing of the screws can not be greater
six diameters and each plate must be connected to each main component with minimal
three screws.
In the case of welded plates, each weld line joining a sheet to a component
page should have a sum of lengths of not less than 3 /
1
the length of the plate.
5.3.6.2.6 Elements of travejamento lattice, they are flat bars, angles, shapes
U profile or any other, should be arranged such that the slenderness ratio
l r / of
each major component, between the points of attachment of travejamento does not exceed the rate
slenderness of the bar as a whole.
The elements of travejamento shall be designed to resist a shear force
requesting calculation, normal to the axis of the bar equal to 2% of the strength of the requesting Compression
calculation that acts on the composite bar.
The slenderness ratio l r / of elements in travejamento simple arrangement can not be greater
140 that, in a double arrangement (array X), than 200. the length L is taken equal to
free length between bolts or welds that connect the elements of the travejamento
the main components, in the case of simple arrangement, and 70% of the length of the case
arrangement X.
In dual arrangement (X) must be a link between the elements of travejamento in
intersection thereof.
The angle of inclination of elements travejamento to the longitudinal axis of the bar,
preferably, should not be less than 60 to 45 and simple arrangement for double arrangement (X).
When the transverse distance between the screws or welds that connect the elements
travejamento the main components exceeds 380 mm, the arrangement must
preferably be double (X) or consisting of angles.
5.3.6.2.7 travejamento elements may be replaced by continuous plates with a
succession of access openings. The net width of these plates, the corresponding sections to
openings may be considered participating in resistance to normal force, provided that:
a) their relationship
b t / is limited to
186 E f ;
y
b) the relationship between the length (in the direction of the normal force) and the gap width not
is greater than 2;
Page 52
52

c) the clear distance between openings in the direction of the normal force, is not less than the
transverse distance between nearest lines of fasteners or welds that connect these
plates to the main components;
d) the openings have a minimum radius of 38 mm around the perimeter.
5.3.6.2.8 The requirements for compressed composite rods are illustrated in Figures 9
, and 10. Replacing travejamento lattice by regularly spaced plates forming
travejamento in context, is not covered by this Standard. In this construction, the reduction of
resistance due to shearing distortion can not be ignored.
N
And
y f
mm
and
12
t 460
1

And
y f
mm
and
75
t
0,
305
And
y f
mm
and
12
t 460
1

And
y f The
mm
and
75
t
305
0,

tes
sthe
iten
m
d
ryou
the
fas
in
of
the
ld
So
l
tno
onju
et s
iten
the C
) max
rm
nh
you
read KL
(r
in
3
in
the
4
ld
So
m
)/ R
ax
(l
sso
of
o
fu
sa
he
the tn
rtthe
P fand
d onjuB
C
) max
r
KL
3(4
the
The sso
nh m
ax
fu
he
read )/ R
rtthe
P in (l
sthe
fusion
For
to
un
et s
iten
rm
you
in
the
x the conj
the
m
)
r
KL
3( 4
b
1.5
and
ad
sofd
im
b and
tio
gatre
1.0
Li
ex
b
4d
ld
So
m
)(l/ R
ax
C
b
N
Baseplate or
machined surface
rMin
t
DC Court
rMin
BB Cut
Section AA
Figure 9 - composite bars compressed
Page 53
53
b 1.86fEyt
GG Cut
rMin
EE Court
and
ad
id
in
tr
x
and
ad
ap
h
C
E
X
u
the
he
ltu
p
d
jthe
ran
air
in
the
en
m
eja
raTv
N
b
3 sso
b mo
nithe
mRafu
p
b
6
dE
G
l 0
1 20
7/ lR
0,
ithe
IAR
d
and
term
45
tn
o
jn
c)ruo
(
l KL
x
ma
/(LR)
In plate
b2
L
ples
sim
tjhe
ran
air
in
he
ten
m
eja
ar v
T
06
and
tremidad
x
and
and
l 14
ad
0
ap
l/1R
Ch
b
F
b
r les
tn
o the
p ple
jn
c)ruo us
m sor
du
rthe
to
KL
l ( 80to
n hey
myes
and
o
nn
3
t
n
L
>
x
j ove
a
m
j
b
ma
AC
and
he
/(LR)rtPa
c
/
travbeam
Solder
Length
F total weld2
3
2
D H
8
r 3
D
b 1.86fEyt
N
r1= Radius of gyration
minimum
element
of travejamento
FF Cut
b50
HH Court
n
m
r
Figure 10 - Composite Bars compressed

5.4 prismatic bars subjected to bending normal single
5.4.1 General
5.4.1.1 This subsection shall apply to the design of prismatic bars subjected to
normal single static bending caused by actions under the following conditions:
Page 54
54

- I and H sections with two axes of symmetry flexed around one of these axes;
- Sections I and H with an axis of symmetry in the plane of the soul flexed around the axis
center of inertia perpendicular to the soul;
- U sections flexed around a central axis of inertia;
- Tubular sections and rectangular casket with two axes of symmetry flexed around
of these axes;
- Solid circular or rectangular sections, flexed around a central axis
inertia;
- Circular tubular sections flexed around any axis passing through the center of
gravity.
5.4.1.2 The transverse loading should always be on a plane of symmetry, except

U-profiles bent in relation to the axis perpendicular to the soul, when the result of the
load must pass through the shear center of the cross section.
5.4.1.3 In sizing so that the last limit states occur not related to
performances of the bending moment and shear force, must be met the following conditions:
M
Sd
Rd
V V
Sd
Rd
Where:
M Sd requestor is the bending moment calculation, derived from the combinations of
actions given in 4.7.2;
VSdshear strength is requesting calculation, derived from the combinations of actions
given in 4.7.2;
M Rdis resistant bending moment calculation determined according to 5.4.2;
VRdis resistant to shear force calculation, determined as 5.4.3.

Must still be checked all limit states apply, as
existing requirements in different parts of this Standard.
5.4.2 resistant bending moment calculation
5.4.2.1 The calculation resistant bending moment, M
M
Rd
RdIs given by:
M
Rk
Where:
Page 55
is the weighting coefficient of resistance to bending, equal to 1.10;
M Rkis the characteristic resistant bending moment determined according to 5.4.2.2.
5.4.2.2 The characteristic resistant bending moment, M
RkShould be determined according to
Annexes D or F, as applicable, complying with the provisions of 5.4.2.3 to 5.4.2.7. Are
apply, as appropriate, the ultimate limit states of lateral torsional buckling with (FLT)
local buckling of the compressed table (FLM), local buckling of the soul (FLA), local buckling
wall of the pipe (FLP) and the pulled flow table (EMT).
5.4.2.3 The characteristic values
of bending moment resistant to buckling limit state
with lateral torque (FLT) are only valid for the application of external forces on the center level
shear of the cross section and can not be used when there forces
destabilizing, ie, forces whose direction deviates from the shear center of the section
cross during buckling. When used in the case of stabilizing forces, ie
forces whose direction approaches the shear center of the cross section during
buckling, lead to conservative results.
5.4.2.4 To ensure the validity of the elastic analysis, the moment resistance characteristic not
can be taken greater than
150 W f , W being the minimum elastic modulus of resistance of
y
section in relation to the bending axis f
y the yield strength of the steel.
5.4.2.5 For the determination of characteristic bending moment resistant to limit state FLT,
may be necessary to calculate a modification factor for bending moment diagram does not
uniform length for the unlocked (U
b) Analyzed. This factor, except for the situation
provided in 5.4.2.6, is given by:
- Beams cantilevered from a section in the lateral torsional buckling with (see
4.8.5.4) and the end not supported without restraint:
C = 100
b
- In all other cases:
C =
b 2 5,M
Where:
12 5,M
max
+3 M + 4 M + 3 M
max
The
B
C
55
M max is the value of the maximum moment requestor calculation in module, the
Unlocked length;
M is the value of the applicant moment calculation, module, the section located at a
The
quarter of the length unlocked;
M B is the value of requesting time calculation in module, the central section of
Unlocked length;
M C is the value of the applicant moment calculation, module, located in section three
quarter length unlocked.
Page 56
56
In checking the FLT, should be taken as bending moment calculation requesting the largest
time (positive or negative) in length unlocked considered.
5.4.2.6 In beams with sections I, H and U flexed around the central axis of inertia perpendicular
the soul, and rectangular tubular sections coffin and flexed around a central axis of inertia,
unlocked in a length (L
b) In which one of the tables is free to move
laterally and the other table has continuous lateral restraint against this type of displacement,
modification factor for nonuniform bending moment is given by:
- When the table with continuous lateral restraint is pulled in at least one
unlocked edge length:
M
2 M
8
12
C = 300 b
3M
3 (M + M )
0
0
1
Where:
M 0 is the largest value of requesting time calculation that pulls the table with
continuous lateral restraint at the ends of the length unlocked, with sign
negative;
M 1 is the value of the bending moment calculation requesting the other end of
length unlocked (if that moment to pull free table, will have positive sign
the second term of the equation and should be taken equal to zero in the third term and
pull the table with continuous lateral restraint, will have a negative sign in the second and
third terms in the equation);
M 2 requestor is the bending moment calculation in the central section of length
unlocked, with a positive sign if the free traction table and a negative sign if tractionate
table with continuous lateral restraint.
- In stretches with zero moment at the ends, subjected to an action
evenly distributed, with only the table contained continuously pulled against
lateral displacement:
C = 200
b
- In all other cases:
C = 100
b
In checking the FLT, should be taken as bending moment calculation requesting the largest
time length considered unlocked, the region in which the non-compressed table
is contained against lateral displacement.
5.4.2.7 The beams, with or without reinforcement plates table (lamellae - see 5.4.4), even with holes
screw on the tables, can be scaled to the bending moment on the basis of
gross section properties, since
075 f The 090 f The in both tables. On
u fn
y fg
However, if at any table,
075 f The < 090 f The The resistant bending moment
u fn
y fg
Page 57
57
characteristic, M RkCan not be taken more than

Wf, and the properties of the cross section
y
shall be calculated based on the effective area of
the pulled table, The
feGiven by:
5 f
u The
fnt
6f
y
A=
fe
Where:
f is the yield strength of steel;

y
f u is the tensile strength tensile steel;
W is the least resistant elastic modulus of the cross section, determined by taking
pulled to the table area A
fe;
The
tensioned or compressed table, whichever is applicable, calculated
fn is the net area of
accordance with 5.2.4;
The
the pulled table, calculated in accordance with 5.2.4;
fnt is the net area of
The
tensioned or compressed table, whichever is applicable.
fg is the gross area of
5.4.3 resistant shear force calculation
5.4.3.1 The sturdy shear calculation, V
V
Rd
RdIs given by:
V
Rk
Where:
V is the shear resistant feature, determined in accordance with 5.4.3.2 or
Rk
5.4.3.3, as applicable;
is the weighting coefficient of resistance to bending, equal to 1.10.
5.4.3.2 Sections I, H and U flexed around the axis perpendicular to the soul and sections coffin and
rectangular tubular
5.4.3.2.1 In section I, H and U flexed around the central axis of inertia perpendicular to the soul and
coffin rectangular tubular sections and flexed around a central axis of inertia, strength
shear resistant feature, V
Is given by:
Rk
a) for
V=
Rk
b) To
lp
<
Page 58
58

V
Rk
pV
lp
>
c) To
Rk
= 128
2
V
lp
Where:
=
h
t
= 110
= 137
r
E
v
f
y
E
v
f
y
5
5 + ()
, for
theh 2
k =
v
500 , for
the
3
h
2
the
the
260
> 3 or
> (
)
h
h
h t/
w
Vp is the shear force corresponding to the lamination (s) soul (s) for shear,
l
given in 5.4.3.2.2;
a is the distance between the center lines of two adjacent transverse stiffeners;
h is the vertical clearance of the soul between tables;
t wis the thickness (s) of core (s).
5.4.3.2.2 The cutting force corresponding to the lamination (s) soul (s) is given by shear
by:
V=
pl
060 The f
w y
In this equation, A w is the effective shear area, which should be taken equal to:
a) souls in sections I, H and U:
td;
w
b) in the symmetrical souls coffin and tubular rectangular sections:
2 th .
w
Page 59
where d is the total height of the cross section.
5.4.3.2.3 For sections I and H the following rules must be obeyed:
a) the transverse stiffeners are welded to the (s) soul (s) and the tables of the profile,
it may, however, the tensioned side of the table, be interrupted so that the
distance between the nearest points of solders table / stiffener and soul / soul remains
betweent4 and t6;
w
w
b) width / thickness ratio of the elements forming the stiffeners can not
exceed
055 E f ;
y
c) the moment of inertia of the stiffener section of a single or a pair of stiffeners

(One on each side of the web) in relation to the axis plane of the heart can not be
less than
ta3 j Where j = 2 [5, ()theh 2] - 2 0 5,;
w
d) when h / tw is equal to or greater than 260, the ratio
the[260 h ( t / ) ]2 ;
w
the h / can not exceed 3 nor
e) if the stiffeners are attached by screws to the soul, the maximum spacing between
centers of these screws can not exceed 300 mm. If solder fillets are used
flashing, the clear distance between these fillets can not exceed 16 times the thickness of
soul, nor 250 mm.
In the case of sections U, coffin and rectangular tubes, these rules should be properly
adapted.
5.4.3.2.4 An alternative method for determining the shear resistant characteristic,
using the concept of field strength, is presented in Annex G. If the shear force
Tough is determined by this Annex, and:
060
075
Rkt V
Sd
Rkt
M
M
Rk M Rk
Sd
must be verified interaction between bending moment and shear force by meeting the
following expression:
M
M
Where:
V
Sd + 0625
Sd 1375
V
Rk
Rkt
59
is the weighting coefficient of resistance to bending, equal to 1.10;
Page 60
60

M Sd and V
Sd are requesting the bending moment calculation and shear strength requestor
calculation, respectively;
M Rk is the characteristic resistant bending moment determined under subsection F.2
Annex F;
V is resistant to shear determined characteristic according to subsection G.1
Rkt
Annex G.
5.4.3.3 Strength shear resistant feature in other cases

5.4.3.3.1 The shear resistant feature, V
RkFor sections I and H flexed around the
axis passing through the median plane of the soul, U sections flexed around the central axis of inertia
parallel to the soul, solid circular and rectangular sections and circular tubular sections, is equal to:
V= V
Rk
pl
with
V=
pl
0 6 The f
w y
Where:
The
w is the effective shear area, which should be taken equal to (A
gross cross-sectional area):
the table and

f is the area of
g the
a) sections in tables I, H and U symmetrical to the central axis of inertia

perpendicular to the soul: 133 The;
f
b) in rectangular solid sections:
c) in circular solid sections:
d) in circular tubular sections:
067 The;
g
075 The ;
g
050 The .
g
5.4.3.3.2 The shear resistant feature given in 5.4.3.3.1 assumes that the section does not
has elements subject to local buckling by shear stresses, and the stresses of
shear acting on elements of the section parallel to the axis of flexion, are inferior
those who work in the elements perpendicular to this axis.
5.4.4 plates reinforcing the overlapping tables (lamellae)
5.4.4.1 When overlapping plates are used to tables with less than the length ranging from
beam, they must extend beyond the section which theoretically would be unnecessary,
called transition section. Such extension should be attached to the parent table by
high strength bolts (connected by friction) or fillet welds, sized to
a request calculation equal to the resultant of the normal stresses on the slide, caused by
bending moment calculation requesting the transition section (Figure 11).
Page 61
5.4.4.2 Additionally, in case of welded lamellae, their longitudinal welds
ends in the length 'should be sized to a request for calculation
equal to the resultant of the normal stresses on the slide, caused by bending moment requestor
calculating a section on the far 'end of the coverslip with a' (figure 11):
a) equal to the width of the lamella, where there is continuous fillet weld, the nominal size
(See 6.2.6.2) equal to or greater than 75% of the thickness of the lamella along the edges
the same longitudinal length a 'and by its end;
b) equal to 1.5 times the width of the slide, where there is a continuous weld fillet size
Nominal (see 6.2.6.2) less than 75% of the thickness of the lamella along the edges
the same longitudinal length a 'and by its end;
c) equal to twice the width of the flap when there is no welding through its
end, however, there are continuous fillet welds along their edges
the longitudinal length '.
Transition section
Overlying plate (lamella)
Diagram of bending moments

b
Transition section
Extension beyond
the transition section
b
Transition section
a = b or b depending 1.5
nominal size of the fillet
b
Transition section
a = 2b
Figure 11 - Overlapping plates of the beams tables
61
Page 62
62
5.4.5 Additional requirements related to welded sections

5.4.5.1 The tables consist of welded beams can have varying thickness or
width due to the splice plates in different sizes or use of lamellae.
5.4.5.2 In welded, the weld joining tables and soul must be designed to withstand the
Total horizontal shear resulting from bending. The horizontal distribution of welds
flashing should be proportional to the intensity of shear, however, the spacing
Longitudinal can not exceed the maximum allowed for compressed or tensile bars,
according to 5.2.9) and 5.3.6.2.3 respectively pulled and compressed to tables. In addition
addition, the solder joining table and soul must be sized to transmit any force to the soul
applied directly on the table, unless they make checks evidencing the transmission
of such force only by contact.
5.5 prismatic bars subjected to a combination of axial force and moments
bending and torsion
This subsection shall apply to the verification of the ultimate limit states prismatic bars subject
the combined effects of normal force and bending moment caused by static actions, with or
untwisted, or subject only to torsion. Additionally, should be checked every state
usage limits apply, as existing in various parts of this standard prescriptions.
Sections 5.5.1 symmetrical bending and subjected to normal and oblique simple flexion and
composed
5.5.1.1 5.5.1.2 In the condition appears to be met by prismatic bar whose section
Cross having one or two axes of symmetry, subjected to the combined effects of strength
normal and bending moment around one or both of the central axes of inertia loaded
so no twisting occurs. The condition appears to be met in 5.5.1.4 for the purpose
the cutting forces acting simultaneously along the central axes of inertia of the section
cross.
5.5.1.2 Unless we make a more precise analysis of the interaction between the combined effects
normal force of tension or compression and bending moments, the limitation must be obeyed
provided by the following expressions of interaction:
a)
for
N
N
Sd 0 2
Rd
N
8 M Sdx, M Sdy
Sd +
+
1 0,
N
9 M
M
Rd
Rdx,
Rdy
b)
for
N
N
Sd < 0 2
Rd
M
M
N
Sdx, + Sdy 1 0,
Sd +
2N
M
M
Rd
Rdx,
Rdy
Where:
Page 63
63
NSdrequestor is the normal force calculation traction or compression, whichever is applicable,

determined according to 4.8;
N is resistant to normal force calculation of traction or compression, whichever is applicable,
Rd
respectively determined in accordance with 5.2 or 5.3;
M Sd, xand M
Sd, yare the bending moments requesters calculate respectively around
the x and y axes of the cross section, determined in accordance with 4.8;
M Rd xand M
Rd, yare resistant bending moment calculation, respectively around
the x and y axes of the cross section, determined in accordance with 5.5.1.3.
5.5.1.3 The calculation resistant bending moments around the central inertia axes of x and y
the cross section, respectively M
Rd xand M
Rd,Must
y be determined according to 5.4,
changing the values
of
and
for
the
limit
state
of
local
buckling of the soul towards flexion
p
r
around the axis perpendicular (s) core (s) when the normal strength calculation requesting, N
compression, as follows:
a) value of p
= 376
p
h
E
f
1-
275 N
Sd , for
N
y
N
N
Sd 0125
or
h
= 112 p
p
h
b) value of r for
E
= 149
r
f
y
E
f
y
075
233 -
N
N
Sd 149 E , for
f
y
y
N
N
Sd > 0125
h
150
h
c
1 + 283
N
h
Sd
1h
N
c
y
570
N
E
Sd
1 - 074
f
N
y
y
Where:
h is the height of the soul, taken equal to the distance between inner faces of the profile tables
soldiers and equal to that value minus the two rays of agreement between the table and the soul
Rolled sections;
hc is twice the distance from the center of gravity of the cross section to the inner face of
compressed table in welded and equal to that value minus the fillet radius
between table and soul in rolled sections;
Sd, Is
Page 64
64

hp is twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis of the cross section for the performance
only bending the inner face of the welded compressed time table is equal to
this value less the fillet radius between table and soul in rolled sections;
Ny is the normal compressive force corresponding to the flow cross section
effective, given by the product (
Q The f ) And Q local buckling coefficient,
g y
determined in accordance with Annex E and
A cross-sectional area;
g gross
is the weighting coefficient of resistance to compression, equal to 1.10.
5.5.1.4 For patients with normal flexion, checking the shear force should be taken as
5.4.3. For cases of oblique bending, should evaluate the need to consider
superposition of the effects of shear forces requesters calculation that act on the axes
center of inertia of the cross section.
Sections 5.5.2 asymmetric bending and subjected to normal and oblique simple flexion and
sections subjected to torsion, normal force, bending moments and shear
5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 In the conditions to be met by prismatic bars are presented
asymmetric section subjected to the combined effects of normal force and bending moment around
one or both main axes of inertia of the section, so that load does not occur
twist, and the prismatic bars subjected to torsion, bending moments, shear forces and
normal force.
5.5.2.2 The resistant strain calculation,
RdFor the ultimate limit states the following should be
greater than or equal to the requesting voltage calculation expressed in terms of normal stress,
shear stress,
by the elasticity theory, using the
Sd,Determined
v
combinations of shares calculation. Like this:
Sd,Or
n
a) for the limit states of instability under the effect of normal stress:
Sdn,
b) for the limit states of instability under the effect of shear stress:
Sdv
060 f
Where:
is the weighting coefficient of resistance equal to 1.10;
is a reduction factor associated with the compression strength determined according to
= f
= 060 f for voltages
to normal stresses and
the
y and
the
y and
shear with
equal
to
the
yield
stress
(normal
or
shear,
which
is
and
applicable) of elastic buckling, for the limit state of instability in question,
5.3.3, taking
Page 65
65
taking into account, where relevant, the interaction between local buckling and
global instability.
5.6 bars of varying section
The calculation and design of bars of variable section must be made in accordance with Annex N.
Tables 5.7 and souls of profiles I and H subjected to concentrated forces
5.7.1 General
This subsection provides requirements for verification of ultimate limit states caused
by concentrated forces between two stiff sections, applied to the external face of at least
one of the tables, perpendicular to your face in sections I and H. The concentrated forces should
be centered on the axis of the cross section passing through the plane of the soul.
5.7.2 Local Bending the table
5.7.2.1 The table of a bar, requested by a concentrated force producing traction on the soul,
should be checked for ultimate limit state local bending.
5.7.2.2 The check presented only applies to concentrated force with length
acting in the direction perpendicular to the length of the bar located between
width of the loaded table. If the length of action of the force is less than
check must be made.
015 b b, where b is the

015 b To
5.7.2.3 Unless the provisions in 5.7.2.5, the applicant concentrated force calculation can not
Where
/
overcome the resistant force calculation of the bar table, equal to
F
is the coefficient
Rkb
weighting for local bending resistance of the soul, equal to 1.10, and F
Rkbis the resisting force
characteristic is given by:
= 625 t 2 f
F
Rkb
f y
Where:
t f is the thickness of the loaded table;
f y is the yield strength of the steel.
5.7.2.4 When the concentrated force acts at a distance from the lower end 10 bar
times the thickness of the table, the resistant force given in 5.7.2.3 should be halved.
5.7.2.5 If the concentrated force requestor calculation overcome the resistant force calculations shall
be placed on the actuation force section, transverse stiffeners on both sides of
soul, soldiers loaded the table and extending until at least half the height of the soul. The
weld connecting transverse stiffeners to the soul must be sized to transmit the force
eccentric relative thereto.
5.7.2.6 In the case of welded, the weld between the table and the soul should be able to forward
tractive force between these two elements.
Page 66
66
5.7.3 Local Drain Soul

5.7.3.1 The Soul of a bar, requested by tension or compression caused by a force
concentrated that acts on the table, should be checked for the ultimate limit state flow
location.
5.7.3.2 Unless the provisions in 5.7.3.3, the applicant concentrated force calculation can not
Where
/
overcome the resistant force calculation of the bar soul, equal to
F
is the coefficient
RKW
weighting for local flow resistance of the soul, equal to 1.00, and F
is the resisting force
RKW
a) when the force is concentrated at a greater distance from the end of the bar
height of the cross section:
= (5 k + l ) f t
F
RKW
n y w
b) when the power is concentrated at a distance from the bottom edge or
equal to the height of the cross section:
= ( 2 5,k + l ) f t
F
RKW
n y w
Where:
l n is the length of action of the force in the longitudinal direction of the beam;
k is the thickness of the table loaded over the side of the weld bead parallel to the soul, the
case of welded; the thickness of the table plus the fillet radius to
soul, in the case of rolled profiles;
t wis the web thickness.
be placed reinforcing plates of soul or placed on the actuation force section
transverse stiffeners on both sides of the soul, extending until at least half the
Cell height. If the force is tensile, the stiffeners are welded to the loaded table.
If the force is compression, the stiffeners should be in perfect contact with the table
charged or be welded to this table to impart strength to the soul. The solder connecting
transverse stiffeners to the soul must be sized to convey the eccentric force
relative to same.
5.7.3.4 In the case of welded and concentrated tensile force, the weld between the table and the soul
must be able to transmit the force between these two elements.
5.7.4 Wrinkle soul
5.7.4.1 The Soul of a bar, requested compression caused by a concentrated force
that acts on the table, should be checked for the ultimate limit state wrinkling.
Page 67
5.7.4.2 Unless the provisions in 5.7.4.3, the concentrated force acting calculation can not overcome
Where
/
resistant force calculation of the bar soul, equal to
F
is the coefficient
Rke
67
weighting of resistance to wrinkling of the soul, equal to 1.35, and F

Rkand
is the resisting force
a) when the compressive force is concentrated at a distance from the end of the bar
greater than or equal to half the height of the cross section:
= 080 t 2 1 + 3
F
Rke
w
n
d
t
t
15,
Ef t
y f
t
w
b) when the compressive force is concentrated at a distance from the end of the bar
less than half the height of the cross section:
- To
l n d02
= 040 t 2 1 + 3
F
Rke
w
- To
n
d
t
t
15,
Ef t
y f
t
w
l n d>02
= 040 t 2 1 +
F
Rke
w
4l
d
n - 02
t
t
w
f
15,
Ef t
y f
t
w
Where:
d is the height of the cross section of the bar;
t f is the thickness of the loaded table;
t wis the thickness of the soul;
l n is the length of action of the force in the longitudinal direction of the beam.
be placed reinforcing plates or soul, placed in the action section that forces a
a transverse stiffener side of the heart or transverse stiffeners placed
both sides of the soul, in perfect contact with the loaded table or soldiers at this table,
extending until at least half the height of the soul. The weld connecting the stiffeners
Cross the soul must be sized to convey the eccentric force in relation to
thereof.
5.7.5 Lateral Buckling of the soul
5.7.5.1 The Soul of a bar, requested compression caused by a concentrated force
that operates in the compressed table, should be checked for the ultimate limit state buckling
Page 68
68
side, if the lateral relative displacement between the compressed table and loaded the table
pulled is not prevented at the point of force application.
5.7.5.2 Unless the provisions of 5.7.5.3, 5.7.5.4 and 5.7.5.5, the force concentrated requestor
/
calculation can not overcome the resistant force calculation of the bar soul, equal to
FRkl
the weighting coefficient of resistance to lateral buckling of the soul, equal to 1.20, and F
strength resistant characteristic, given by:
a) if the rotation of the loaded table is prevented, for
=
F
Rkl
(h t ) ( b ) 230
w l f
3
C t3 t
h t
r w f 1+ 0 4
w
h2
l bf
b) if the rotation of the compressed table is not prevented to
=
F
Rkl
Where is
Rkl it is
(h t ) ( b ) 170
w l f
3
C t3 t
h t
r w f 04
w
h2
l b
f
Where:
l is the longer length unlocked laterally between the two tables involving
section performance of the concentrated force;
bf is the width of the table;
t f is the thickness of the table;
h is the distance between the inner faces of the radii of less tables in accordance
case of rolled sections, or the distance between the inner faces of tables in the case of
welded;
M < M and
331 10 6 MPa when
d
r
M M section of the force (F d requestor is the bending moment calculation and M r is
d
r
bending moment corresponding to the onset of yield as Annex D without
consider the residual stresses).
Cr is equal to
662 10 6 MPa
when
(h t ) ( b ) exceed 2.30 or 1.70, respectively, when the rotation table

5.7.5.3 If
w l f
charged or is not obstructed, the ultimate limit state of lateral buckling of the soul has
likely to occur.
5.7.5.4 If the rotation of the loaded table is prevented and concentrated strength calculation requestor
overcome the resisting force calculation given in 5.7.5.2-a), a lateral restraint at the table
pulled the actuation force section should be provided. Can optionally be
placed in this section transverse stiffeners on both sides of the soul, in perfect contact
with the loaded table or welded thereto, extending until at least half the height of
Page 69
soul. The weld connecting the stiffeners to the soul must be sized to transmit the force
between these two elements. Another alternative is the placement of reinforcing plates soul
extending until at least half the height of the soul, which must be scaled
to resist all of the concentrated force.
5.7.5.5 If the rotation of the loaded table is not prevented and the strength concentrated requestor
calculation overcome the resisting force calculation given in 5.7.5.2-b), lateral restraints in both
69
tables section of action of the force should be provided.

5.7.6 Buckling of compression soul
5.7.6.1 The Soul of a bar, requested compression caused by a pair of forces
concentrated opposite directions, acting in both tables of the same cross-section must
be checked for the ultimate limit state buckling compression.
5.7.6.2 Unless the provisions in 5.7.6.4, the force concentrated requesting calculation (value of each
under par) can not overcome the resistant force calculation of the bar soul, equal to
F
where is the weighting coefficient of resistance to buckling of the soul, equal to 1.10, and F
is the resisting force characteristics, given by:
=
F
Rkc
24 t 3 E f
w
y
h
5.7.6.3 When the pair of concentrated forces located at a distance from the end of the beam
less than half the height of the cross section, the resisting force should be given in 5.7.6.2
halved.
be placed reinforcing plates of soul, placed in the activity section that forces a
a transverse stiffener side of the heart or transverse stiffeners placed
both sides of the soul, in perfect contact with the loaded table or soldiers at this table,
extending the full height of the heart. The weld connecting transverse stiffeners to the soul
must be sized to transmit the force eccentric with respect thereto.
5.7.7 Shear in the web panel zone
5.7.7.1 Reinforcing Plates soul or diagonal stiffeners shall be provided
within the outline of a rigid connection between beam and column (the area of
the column web panel),
whose souls lie in the same plane when the shear strength calculation requester,
Where
/
transmitted by the beam tables, F
Exceeds the F
is the resistance coefficient
Sdv
RKV
flexion, equal to 1.10, and F RKV
is the shear resistant feature, given by:
a) when the effect of deformation of the column web panel zone of stability
structure is not considered in the analysis:
- To
F 04N
Sdv
lp
= 060 f d t
F
RKV
y c w
- To
>04N
F
Sdv
lp
Page 70
70

F
= 060 f d t 1 4 - Sdv
F
RKV
y c w
N
lp
b) when the stability of the structure, including the plastic deformation of the panel zone
the column web is considered in the analysis:
- To
075 N
Rkc
,/
Rkc
Sdv
lp
3b t2
= 060 f d t 1 +
fc fc
F
RKV
y c w
d d t
v c w
-
for
> 075 N
F
Sdv
lp
3b t2
fc fc
= 060 f d t 1 +
F
RKV
y c w
d d t
v c w
19-
1 2F
Sdv
N
lp
Where:
t is the thickness of the soul;
w
bfc is the width of the abutment table;
t fc is the thickness of the abutment table;
dv is the height of the cross section of the beam;
dc is the height of the column cross section;
f y is the yield strength of the pillar;
Np is the normal compressive force corresponding to the flow section
l
Cross-pillar, without regard to local buckling, equal to
f The;
y g
The
the column cross section.
g is the gross area of
5.7.7.2 Reinforcing Plates soul, when used, must be properly welded to
absorb the expected portion of the total shear force.
5.7.7.3 diagonal stiffeners, when used, must be connected to the column web with solder
sized to resist the eccentric force transmitted by the beam.
5.7.8 ends of beams without restriction to rotation and soul free
Transverse stiffeners should be used at ends of beams that have no
type of restriction to rotation about the longitudinal and in which souls are not attached to shaft
other beams or pillars. These stiffeners shall be welded to the tables and the soul section
Cross, extending the full height of the soul.
Page 71
5.7.9 Additional Requirements for stiffeners to concentrated forces
5.7.9.1 The transverse and diagonal stiffeners must also meet the following
requirements:
a) the width of the stiffener added to half the thickness of the bar can not be soul
less than one third of the width of the table or plate which receives the force connection
concentrated;
b) the thickness of the stiffener can not be smaller than half the thickness of the table
71
Bar or connecting plate that receives the concentrated force, and also can not be less
179 f E .
its width multiplied by
y
5.7.9.2 The transverse stiffeners used to prevent the occurrence of ultimate limit states
related to the action of concentrated force, extending the full height of the soul, when
Tablets must be compressed and scaled bar according to 5.3 for the
ultimate limit state of instability by bending about an axis in the plane of the soul. The
cross section is considered to be formed by stiffeners over a range of soul
equal width
12 t If the stiffeners are end and equal to
25 t If they are in
w
w
an inner section. The length of buckling should be taken equal to
075 h Where h is the
Cell height.
5.7.9.3 The weld connecting the stiffeners to the soul must be sized to convey the
excess shear stiffeners for the soul, when the stiffeners are not
welded to the loaded table.
5.7.10 Use of reinforcing plates soul to concentrated forces
Reinforcing plates of soul, always consisting of two plates placed next to the soul of
both its sides must have a thickness and length allowing them to reach resistance
necessary to prevent the occurrence of the ultimate limit state which led to their placement and
be welded so as to absorb the expected portion of the concentrated force.
6 Specific conditions for the design of steel connections
6.1 General
6.1.1 Basis of design
Metallic bonds consist of binding elements (stiffeners, connection plates,
valances, corbels, etc..) and connecting means (welds, bolts, threaded rods and round
pin). These components must be sized so that its resistance calculation
a certain ultimate limit state is equal to or greater than the request calculation determined:
(1) the analysis of the structure subjected to combinations of calculating shares, as 4.7; (2) as
resistance of a specified percentage of the connected bar. In some specific situations,
resistance calculation can also be based on limit state.
Page 72
72
6.1.2 Stiffness of the connections between beam and column

6.1.2.1 In the elastic structural analysis, a beam-column connection can be considered labeled if
S 0 5,E I L ; can be considered as rigid if
S 8EI L
in the case of structures
i
v v
i
v v
and indeslocveis S 25 E I L in the case of movable structures (see 6.1.2.2).
i
v v
Where:
Si the rigidity of the connection is calculated from the rotation-time diagram, with the stiffness
Drying corresponding to
2 3 /resistant bending moment calculation of the bond;
I vL vare the moment of inertia of the cross section in terms of structure and length
connected to the link, respectively beam;
E is the modulus of elasticity of steel.

In any case, the analysis for elastic connection may be considered semi-rigid, with
stiffness Si constant throughout the loading.
For plastic analysis, the effect of the moment-rotation behavior of the connections can only
be considered if it is possible to reproduce numerically the characteristics of nonlinearity of this behavior. It is recommended to consult for this type of analysis, bibliography
specialized on the criteria for the classification of bonds, based on capacity
and the resilient deformability thereof.
6.1.2.2 The limit
L can be used only for walk in which each floor is

v v
satisfy the relation K K 0 1 Where K is the average value I L / for all beams at the top
v
v p
v
v
the floor and K p is the average value
I / L for all the pillars of the floor (I
v is the time to
p p
inertia of a beam in the plane of the structure I
p is the moment of inertia of a pillar in the plane of
structure G v is the will of a beam considered center-to-center pillars; and L
p is the height of
floor for a pillar).
If
25 E I
S 25 E I L But
i
v v
movable structures.
K < 0 1 , The connection should be considered semi-rigid to

p
6.1.3 Bars with flexible connections at supports

The flexible connections of beams and trusses can take into account only the reactions calculation
compatible with the hypothesis of flexibility, unless otherwise indicated in
responsible for the project. These flexible connections must allow rotation of beams
simply supported at the ends; for it allows the consideration of deformations
inelastic autolimitveis
the link. Links with initial stiffness equal to or less than the
lower limits of the expressions given in 6.1.2 may be considered as links
flexible, disregarding the effects of the stiffness in the global response of the structure.
6.1.4 Bars with rigid or semi-rigid connections at the supports
In determining the strength calculation of rigid or semi-rigid connections must be
considering the combined effects of all internal forces calculation, from
Page 73
total or partial stiffness connections, which may be considered rigid connections whose stiffness
Home is less than the upper limits of the expressions presented in 6.1.2.
6.1.5 Minimum resistance of connections
6.1.5.1 To ensure structural integrity, the requirements of 4.9 must be met. For
other situations, apply 6.1.5.2 and 6.1.5.3.
6.1.5.2 Connections subject to a request under 45 kN calculation, except for diagonal
travejamento of composite bars, rods made of round bars and sleepers
lateral closing of buildings, shall be designed for a calculation request equals
45 kN.
6.1.5.3 The connections of tensioned or compressed bars, and resist the normal forces
Applicants for calculating the bar, must also be sized to equal the forces calculation
73
50%onofit.the resistance calculation of the bar to the types of normal force (tension or compression) that
act
6.1.6 Bars efforts transmitting compressed by contact
6.1.6.1 To ensure structural integrity, the requirements of 4.9 must be met. For
other situations, apply 6.1.6.2, 6.1.6.3 and 6.1.6.4.
6.1.6.2 pillar whose ends are machined for example by cutting with a saw to
transmit compressive forces by contact, the end connections with plates
support, or between pillars, must be made with bolts or welds able to keep their
positions safely connected all parts.
6.1.6.3 Other compressed bars with machined ends, passing efforts by
contact means and elements should be positioned in connection to keep all aligned
parts of the connection and dimensioned to withstand 50% of the normal resistive force calculation
connected bar.
6.1.6.4 In both previous cases, the said bonds shall be designed to resist
also 100% the calculation requests that are not transmitted by contact, including
cases of reversal efforts.
6.1.7 Prevention of rotation at the supports
The points of support beams and trusses must be prevented from rotating around its axis
longitudinal.
6.1.8 Layout of welds and bolts
6.1.8.1 Groups of screws or welds at the ends of any axially bar
required, must have their centers of gravity about the axis passing through the center of gravity
boom section, unless it is taken into account the effect of eccentricity.
6.1.8.2 In cases of simple valances or double bars and the like, applied axially
is not required that the center of gravity of groups of fillet welds or bolts to rest on the
baricntrico axis of the bar at the ends thereof, for cases not subject to bar
Page 74
74
fatigue; eccentricity between the axis of the bar and the links can be neglected in bars
applied statically, but must be taken into account in bars subjected to fatigue.
6.1.9 Combination of connecting means
6.1.9.1 bolts in combination with welds
6.1.9.1.1 In new construction, high strength bolts in connections per contact or
common screws can not be considered working together with welds; welds,
when used, shall be designed to resist the total requests calculation of
connection. High-strength bolts in friction connections, properly installed, can
be considered working together with welds.
6.1.9.1.2 In making changes in existing structures by welding, rivets and screws
high strength (which are adequately tightened) can be considered existing
to withstand the stresses due to the calculation of loads acting now. Requests due to
new shipments must be resisted by reinforcing welds that are added to
connection.
6.1.9.2 High-strength bolts in combination with rivets
In new or existing buildings, high-strength bolts in friction connections,
installed in accordance with 6.7, can be considered working together with rivets.
6.1.10 lamellar fracture
Should be avoided whenever possible, welded joints where transmission of stresses
traction from shrinking welding performed under constraint conditions of distortion, is
Knife through the planar element in a direction not parallel to the face (for example, L-joints
or T). If it can not be avoided that kind of connection, precautions should be taken to
prevent the occurrence of lamellar fracture.
6.1.11 Limitations of use for welded and bolted
6.1.11.1 welds or high strength bolts with initial prestressing should be used in
following cases:
a) amendments pillar structures with over 60 m in height (see 6.1.11.2);
b) seams pillar structures with a height between 30 and 60 m, where the smaller
horizontal is less than 40% of the time (see 6.1.11.2);
c) amendment of pillar structures of less than 30 m tall, the lower case
horizontal dimension is less than 25% of the time (see 6.1.11.2);
d) connections of beams and trusses of which depends on the bracing system and links
beams and trusses with pillars, structures with over 38 m in height (see 6.1.11.2);
e) connections and splices roof trusses, truss connections with pillars, amendments
pillars, pillars of bracing connections, connections or French hands corbels
used for reinforcement of gateways, and media links parts of cranes, the
structures with cranes with a capacity exceeding 50 kN;
Page 75
f) connections supports parts of machinery or parts subject to impact loads or
cyclical;
g) any other connection that is specified in the drawings of the structure.
6.1.11.2 For purposes of paragraphs a), b), c) and d) of 6.1.11.1, the height of a structure must be
considered as the vertical distance between the average level of the surrounding ground structure and
top of the beams of the roof, in the case of flat roofs or less than 25% slope. On
case of roofs with a slope greater than 25%, the vertical distance is measured between one
middle and the upper face of the roof trusses at the half height of the sloping part. The
garrets may be excluded in determining the height of the structure.
6.1.11.3 For cases not listed in 6.1.11.1, links can be made
with screws
high strength, without initial prestressing, or with common screws.
6.1.12 Amendments of heavy sections
Seams welded with tables or soul of a thickness exceeding 50 mm and profiles
laminates with more than 44 mm thick tables, subject to tensile stresses due to
75
bending moment and normal force, must meet the following requirements:
a) when the plates of the tables or soul are amended before forming the profile of
accordance with the appropriate item of AWS D1.1, the relevant requirements of that standard
apply in lieu of these requirements. If welds are used in slot
full penetration to transmit tensile forces, the requirements of material toughness
given in footnote 7) Table 8, details of the access opening for the welding data
6.1.13, requirements for preheating given in footnote 8) of the Table 8 and the requirements of
surface preparation for flame cutting and inspection are given in 12.2.1.2
applicable.
b) on all seams subjected to traction extenders and plates waiting for welding
must be removed and the surfaces abraded to face milling.
c) at all seams are subject primarily to the compression bars, openings
access for welding necessary for the implementation of full penetration welds shall
meet the requirements given in 6.1.13. Alternatively, such amendments, including cases of
bars subjected to tension due to wind action, may be made by means of details
not induce large deformation retraction; for example, slot welds
partial penetration combined with seamless tables soul through splints and welds
fillet, bolted splices, or combinations of bolts and fillet welds in
seams with splints.
6.1.13 Scraps of beams table for connections and access openings for welding
6.1.13.1 All access openings required to facilitate the welding operation should
have a minimum length of 1.5 times the thickness of the material in which the opening is made. The
height should be adequate for proper deposition of weld metal and the adjacent plates should
be provided for any extenders enough to weld the material space where the opening
is made, but no less than the thickness of the material.
Page 76
76
6.1.13.2 Scraps of beams table for connections and access openings for welding should be
free slots and reentrant corners.
6.1.13.3 In the case of welded with tables or soul of a thickness exceeding 50 mm and
Rolled sections with thickness exceeding 44 mm tables, surfaces clippings beams and
access openings for welding obtained by flame cutting, should be
abraded to bright metal and inspected by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
before the deposition of seam welds. If the region transition curve of such clippings and
openings is performed through drill or saw, this region does not need to be polished.
6.1.14 Considerations links with tubular profiles
Many of the requirements of this section may not apply in part or in full the links
involving one or more tubular profiles, which have unique characteristics of
behavior. It is recommended for the design of these connections, becoming the
adjustments necessary to maintain the level of security provided by this standard, the
use of AWS D1.1 and the following publications:
a)
Wardenier, J.; Kurobane, Y.; Packer, JA; Dutta, D. & Yeomans, N. (1991) Design guide hollow section (CHS) joints under predominantly circular for static loading.
Pour le Developpement International Committee et l'Etude de la Construction tubulaire
(CIDECT). Verlay TV Rheinland. Germany.
b)
Packer, JA; Wardenier, J.; Kurobane, Y.; Dutta, D. & Yeomans, N. (1992) Design guide for rectangular hollow section (RHS) joints under predominantly static
loading. Pour le Developpement International Committee et l'Etude de la Construction
Tubulaire (CIDECT). Verlay TV Rheinland. Germany.
6.1.15 Fatigue
Connections subject to fatigue, see Annex M.
6.2 Solder
6.2.1 General
6.2.1.1 All provisions of AWS D1.1 for the welded joints not subject to fatigue,
are applicable to the implementation of scaled structures in accordance with this standard. A
only exception should be made to the provisions given in 6.1.13, 6.1.14, 6.2.2.2, 6.2.6.2 and Table 8
this Standard, which should be applied instead of AWS D1.1 items dealing with
same subjects.
6.2.1.2 The length and arrangement of welds, including returns, shall be indicated on
design drawings and manufacturing.
Page 77
6.2.2 Effective Areas
6.2.2.1 Solder Slot
The following provisions shall apply:
a) the effective area of
groove welds shall be calculated as the product of length
effective thickness of the weld effective throat;
b) the effective length of a weld notch is equal to its actual length, which
should be equal to the width of the connected part;
c) the effective throat of a slot weld full penetration shall be taken equal to
smaller thicknesses of the welded parts;
d) the effective throat of a weld notch partial penetration is indicated in the table
5;
e) the effective thickness of the neck of a weld joints curved surface when the
Soldering is flush with the surface of the bar is shown in Table 6. prove to
that the effective throat of these welds is being taken regularly, should be made
sampling of welds performed for each welding procedure; Samples
be taken into random sections or perhaps in the sections indicated in the document
Project. The use of larger throat thicknesses than indicated in the table is permitted
77
6, provided the manufacturer can demonstrate, through training, that these thicknesses
can be obtained with greater regularity. The qualification consists of cutting the bar
with curved surface, perpendicular to the axis of the half-length of the weld
and the terminal ends of the weld. These cuts must be made to a number
dimensions of combinations of materials in order to cover the range to be used for
manufacturing, or as required by the responsible project.
Table 5 - Effective throat thickness of the weld notch partial penetration
Position
welding
Welding process
Electrical arc
coated electrode
(SMAW) 1)
2)
Submerged arc welding (SAW)
Electrical arc
Shielding gas
(GMAW) 3)
Arc with flow
in the core
(FCAW) 4)
Throat thickness
effective
Type chamfer
J-groove or U
Depth
chamfer
All
Bevel or bevel
V-groove angle of
60 chamfer 5)
Bevel or bevel
Depth
V-groove angle of
least
3 mm chamfer
chamfer between 45 and5)
60
NOTES:
1)SMAW - Shielded Metal Arc Welding
2)SAW - Submerged Arc Welding
3)GMAW - Gas Metal Arc Welding
4)FCAW - Flux Cored Arc Welding
5)Chamfer angle is the angle between the faces melting
Page 78
78

Table 6 - Effective throat thickness of the weld joints curved surface
Welding Type
Opening the composite gasket
a flat surface and
curve
Opening the composite gasket
two curved surfaces
Radius (R) of the bar or

Folding
Effective throat thickness
Any R
5 R / 16
Any R
R 2 1)
/
Note:
1)Use 3R 8 for
/ the electric arc process with shielding gas (except in the transfer process by
short circuit) when R 25 mm .
6.2.2.2 Solder Fillet
The following provisions shall apply:
a) the effective area of
a fillet weld should be calculated as the product of length
effective thickness of the weld effective throat;
b) the effective throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance measured from the root to the face
theoretical weld flat, except for fillet welds with orthogonal legs performed by
submerged arc process when the effective throat can be increased by 3 mm, for
fillet welds with greater than 10mm legs, and can be taken equal to the leg to solder
Fillet equal to or less than 10mm legs. Leg of the fillet is the smaller of the two sides,
located on the faces melting, the largest triangle that can be inscribed in the weld section.
Root of the weld is the intersection of the faces melting;

c) the effective length of a fillet weld, except for the situations presented in
d) and e) below, must be equal to the total length of the weld size
uniform, including the returns at the ends;
d) for longitudinal fillet welds in connections axially extreme elements
requested, with a length exceeding 300 times the nominal size of the weld, the
effective length should be taken as the total length of the weld multiplied
the reduction factor equal to 0.60, and the length is between 100 and 300 times the
is given by:
nominal size of the weld,
= 12 -
0002
lw
1 0,
b
w
Where:
l w is the total length of the weld;
bw is the nominal size of the weld, given in 6.2.6.2.
e) the effective length of a fillet weld in holes or tears must be measured at
along the line joining the midpoints of the uniform effective throats points. If the area
a fillet weld run in the hole or slot, calculated from this length,
Page 79
is larger than the area given in 6.2.2.3, then the latter should be used as an effective area
the fillet weld.
6.2.2.3 Welding of buffer holes or tears
The effective shear area of
a solder cap, hole or tear, must be equal to the area
Nominal cross-section of the hole or tear in the plane of the surfaces in contact.
6.2.3 Combination of different types of solders
If a single link two or more types of welding (notch fillet buffer are used
holes or slots), calculation of the resistance of each of these types must be determined
and separately to the axis of said group in order to determine the resistance of calculating the
combination. However, this method of composing individual resistances of welds shall not apply to
welds the overlapping slot fillet welds, shall be used in the calculations only
resistance of the latter.
6.2.4 Requirements for the weld metal and welding procedures
6.2.4.1 Table 7, extracted AWS D1.1, are presented base metals and welding electrodes
that can be used in pre-qualified welding procedures. See also 4.1.1 of
AWS D1.1: 2002.
6.2.4.2 For specifications for pre-qualified welding procedures, including
preheat temperatures and interpasses See Section 3 of AWS D1.1: 2002.
6.2.4.3 For other qualifying welding procedures, see Chapter 4 of AWS
D1.1: 2002.
79
6.2.5 Resistance calculation

6.2.5.1 The resistance calculation, R Rd, Given by the ratio between the characteristic resistance R Rk and
weighting coefficient of resistance of various types of solder, is shown in Table 8.
In this table, the MBis the theoretical area of
the face melting, The
the weld,yfis lower
w is the effective area of
flow resistance between the metal base of the joint ef
the
minimum
tensile
strength of
w
weld metal, obtained from Table A.4 in Annex A. In any situation the weld strength
can be made greater than the resistance of the base metal.
Page 80
80

Table 7 - Compatibility with the base metal of the weld metal
Metal base
ABNT
ASTM
NBR 6648 (CG-24 A36

- (t 20 mm)
t 20 mm)
A500 Grade A
NBR 6648 (CG-26 A500
Grade B
A570 Grade 40
t 20 mm)
6649 NBR (CF-24)A570 Grade 45
I 6649 NBR (CF-26)
6650 NBR (CF-24)
6650 NBR (CF-26)
Group
NBR 7007 (MR 250 t 20 mm)
1), 2)
Metal solder compatible

Arc
Arc
with electrode Submerged arc protected
lined
gas
(SMAW)
(SAW)
(GMAW)
AWS A5.1 AWS A5.17 AWS A5.18 E60XX,
F6XX-EXXX,
ER70S-X,
E70XX
F6XX-ECXXX, E70C-XC,
F7XX-EXXX,
E70C-XM
5)AWS A5.5
F7XX-ECXXX (Except-GS)
X-E70XX
5)5)AWS A5.23
AWS A5.28
F7XX-EXXX-XX,ER70S-XXX,
F7XX-ECXXX-XX
XXX-E70C
Arc
with the flow
core
(FCAW)
AWS A5.20 E6XT-X
E6XT-XM, E7XTX
E7XT-XM (except 2-2M, -3, -10, -13,
And GS-14 and except 11 thickness
more than 12 mm)
5)AWS A5.29
E6XTX-X
E6XT-XM
E7XTX-X
E7XTX-XM
5000 NBR (G-30) A36 (T> 20 mm)
A5.17 AWS A5.18 - AWS A5.20 AWS A5.1AWS
E7015,F7XX-EXXX,
5000 NBR (G-35) A570 Grade 50
ER70S-X,
E7XT-X
E7016,F7XX-ECXXX E70C-XC,
NBR 5004 (F32/Q32)
A570 Grade 55
E7XT-XM
E7018,
NBR 5004 (F35/Q35)
A572 Grade 42
E70C-XM
(Except -2,-2M, E7028
5)NBR 5008 (ClassesA572 Grade 50
AWS A5.23
(Except-GS) 3, -10, -13, and -14 I 1, 2 and 2A A572 Grade 55
F7XX-EXXX-XX,
GS and except -11
5)A5.5
I t 100 mm)
5)- thickness
4)
4) AWS
F7XX-ECXXX-XX
AWS A5.28
A588 (T 100 mm)
E7015-X
4)
ER70S-XXX, more than 12 mm)
NBR 5920
A913 Grade 50
E7016-X
4)
XXX-E70C
NBR
5921
A992
E7018-X
Group
5)AWS A5.29
NBR 7007 (AR-290)
NBR 7007 (AR-345)
E7XTX-X
E7XTX-XM
NBR 7007 (AR-COR
4)
345 A or B)
NBR 8261 (Grade B
and C)
5)5)5)- AWS A5.29
5)A913 Grade3)
60
AWS A5.5
AWS A5.23
AWS A5.28
II
I
A913 Grade3)
65
E8015-X
E8016-X
E8018-X
F8XX-ECXXX-XX
F8XX-EXXX-XX,
XXX-E80C
ER80S-XXX,
E8XTX-XM
E8XTX-X
Group
1) together consist of different groups of base metals, solder metals may be used consistent with the
base metal higher resistance or lower resistance, one should use low hydrogen electrodes for
second option. Preheating should be based on the group of greatest resistance.
2) When performed stress relieving welds the weld metal can not contain more than 0.05% vanadium.
3) The limitations of item 5.7 of AWS D1.1: 2002, related to the heat input, do not apply to ASTM A913, and 60 degrees
65.
4) A special welding processes and materials needed (eg electrodes, low alloy E80XX X)
to meet characteristics of atmospheric corrosion resistance and impact resistance of the base metal - see section 3.7.3
AWS D1.1: 2002.
5) Metal welding of B3, B3L, B4, B4L, B5, B5L, B6, B6L, B7, B7L, B8, B8L, B9, groups or any degree BXH in
AWS A5.5, A5.23, A5.28 and A5.29 are not prequalified.
Page 81
Table 8 - Elements of Arithmetic
Welding Type
81
Rk/ welds
Request type and orientation

Traction or compression parallel to axis of weld
Resistance calculation
R /1) 2) 4)
Rk
Same as the base metal
Traction or compression perpendicular to the effective

= 110 5) 7)
R =section
Thef and
Rk w y
solder
Slot welds
full penetration 8)
Shear (vector sum) in the effective section
Traction or compression parallel to axis of weld3)
Slot welds
partial penetration8)
Normal tensile effective section of the weld
The smaller of the two values:

a) Metal base
and
= 110
R Rk= 060The
wf y
b) Weld Metal
= 125
R = 060Thef and
Rk
ww
Same as the base metal
The smaller of the two values:
a) Metal base
= 110
and
R Rk= 060The
wf y
b) Weld Metal
and
= 125
RRk= 060The
wf w
Compression perpendicular to the effective section of

Same
the weld
as the base metal
Fillet welds
Welding of buffer
holes or tears
Shear parallel to the axis of the weld, in the section Weld metal 6)
and
= 135
RRk= 060The
effective
wf w
Traction or compression parallel to axis of weld3) Same as the base metal
Shear on effective section (a request
calculation is equal to the resultant vector of all
Weld metal 6)
calculating the joint forces that produce tensions
9)and
= 135
RRk= 060The
wf w
normal or shear contact surface
from related parties)
Weld metal 6)
Shear parallel to the surfaces in contact, the
= 135
R = 060Thef and
effective section
Rk
ww
NOTES:
1)For definition of effective areas of welds see 6.2.2.
2)The solder metal to be used for each base metal is given in Table 7.
3)Fillet welds and groove welds partial penetration, linking the elements of welded
(Tables and souls), can be calculated without considering the tensile or compressive these elements,
parallel to the axis of the weld; should be considered, however, the shearing stresses caused by forces
Cutting and local effects.
4) In welds subject to non-uniform stresses, the request of calculation and the resistance calculation will be
determined based on unit lengths effective.
5)In this case, when two types of strength of the weld metal in table 7 can be used only class
greater resistance.
6)The base metal shall meet the requirements in 6.5.2 and 6.5.3.
7)For corner joints, and T, with plate waiting not removed from the weld, the weld metal should have a
Minimum tenacity of 27 J at 4 C in Charpy test V-Notch can dispense with the requirement of
tenacity since the gasket is sized using the weighting coefficient of resistance and
characteristic strength of a partial penetration weld. The same requirement applies to toughness
welded seams welded with thick table and / or greater than 50 mm soul and rolled profiles
with more than 44 mm thick tables (in this case there is no alternative to waive such a requirement).
8) In welded seams welded with thick table and / or greater than 50 mm soul and profiles
laminates with thickness exceeding 44 mm tables, a preheating exceeding be applied
175 C.
9)See also 6.2.5.2.
Page 82
82
6.2.5.2 For calls made

with a group of fillet weld located in the same plane and
shares subject to this plan, with the resulting actions through the center of gravity of
group of fillets, the resistance characteristic R
can be determined by:
Rk
R
Rk
=06 f
The 1 +( 0 5,sen 15, )

wi
i
i
Where:
i is the number associated with each thread group;
The
w f ware defined in 6.2.5.1;
is the angle between the resultant of the actions and the longitudinal axis of the thread in question.
6.2.6 Limitations
6.2.6.1 Solder Slot
The minimum thicknesses of effective throats of welds are partial penetration groove
indicated in Table 9. dimension of the weld should be established according to the part more
thick welded, except that such size need not exceed the thickness of less
thick, since the resistance of calculation required is obtained. For this exception and that
to obtain a good quality welding, special care must be taken using preheating. Partial penetration welds can not be used in splices flexed parts.
Table 9 Minimum effective throat thickness of a slot weld penetration
partial
Greater thickness of the base metal
joint (mm)
Below 6.35 and up to 6.35
Over 6.35 to 12.5
Over 12.5 up to 19
Over 19 up to 37.5
Minimum thickness of the throat

Effective (mm) 1)
3
5
6
8
Over 37.5 up to 57
Over 57 up to 152
Above 152
10
13
16
Note:
1)See 6.2.2 for the definition of effective throat.
6.2.6.2 Solder Fillet
6.2.6.2.1 The minimum nominal size (size of the leg) of a fillet weld is given in
10 table, according to the thickest part welded, except that, in the case of links between table and
Soul welded, this dimension need not exceed required to develop
resistance calculation of the soul. For this exception and to obtain a good weld
quality, special care should be taken may be necessary to use preheating.
Page 83
Table 10 - Minimum size of a fillet weld
Greater thickness of the base metal
joint (mm)
Below 6.35 and up to 6.35
Over 6.35 to 12.5
Over 12.5 up to 19
Over 19
Minimum nominal dimension of

1)(Mm)
fillet weld
3
5
6
8
Note:
1)Performed only with a pass.
6.2.6.2.2 The maximum nominal size (size of the leg) of a fillet weld that can be
used along the edges of welded parts is as follows:
a) along edges of material with thickness less than 6.35 mm, no more than
material thickness;
b) along edges of material with thickness less than 6.35 mm, no more than
the thickness of the material minus 1.5 mm unless the drawings that solder
is indicated as enhanced during execution, in order to obtain the total thickness
desired throat ..
6.2.6.2.3 The minimum effective length of a fillet weld (see 6.2.2.2), scaled to
a solicitation of any calculation, can not be less than 4 times its nominal size or
then this nominal size can not be considered more than 25% of the effective length
the weld. Additionally, the effective length of a fillet weld subject to any
request calculation can not be less than 40 mm.
When only longitudinal fillet welds are used in extreme link bar
tensile boring, the length of each fillet may not be smaller than the transverse distance
among them. See also the provisions in 5.2.5.2.
6.2.6.2.4 Intermittent fillet welds may be used, sized to convey
requests calculation when calculating the resistance required is less than a weld
Continuous nominal size of the smallest allowed, and also to connect bar elements
composed. The effective length of any segment of intermittent fillet weld not
83
may be lessrequires
than fourspecial
times the
or less
than 40
dimension. The use of welds
intermittent
carenominal
with local
buckling
andmm
corrosion.
6.2.6.2.5 The minimum overlay in overlay connections, should be equal to 5 times the
thickness of the connected part less thick and not less than 25 mm. Plates or bars connected by
superposition only and subject to transverse axial loading fillets, welds must be
fillet along the edges of both parties, except when the deformation of the
Overlapping is sufficiently contained to prevent opening of the connection effect of
requests calculation.
6.2.6.2.6 Terminations fillet welds may extend until the end or until the edges
of related parties, or disrupted near these sites, contour or form a
closed, except as limited below:
Page 84
84

a) Joints by superposition in which one party extends beyond an edge
subjected to longitudinal tensile stresses, the threads must be stopped at a distance
this edge not less than the size of the leg of the fillet;
b) for connections and structural elements with normal cyclical forces in the elements
projection, frequency and magnitude that would tend to cause progressive fatigue from
a point at the end of the weld, solder fillets should bypass the corners,
extending a distance not less than twice the size of the leg or
width of the connected party, whichever is less;
c) for connections whose project requires flexibility of elements in projection, if
Used returns at the ends of the threads, the length of the returns is not
exceed four times the size of the leg;
d) fillet weld connecting transverse stiffeners welded to the souls should be
interrupted at a distance from the intersection of the surface of the solder composition profile
with the soul no less than four times nor more than six times the thickness of the soul,
except when the end of the stiffener is welded to the table;
e) fillet welds on opposite sides of a common plan must be stopped at the corner
Common to both welds.
6.2.6.2.7 fillet welds may be used in holes or slots to transmit shear forces to
contact surfaces in connections to prevent buckling or superposition (or separation) of
overlapping parts and for connecting section bars compound. For such solders
the provisions of 6.2.2.2 shall be met. The fillet welds in holes or tears can not
be regarded as solders buffer.
6.2.6.2.8 fillet welds may be used with angle between the faces melting understood
between 60 and 120 , provided there is contact between the welded parts across a flat surface
(And not just an edge). For other angles can not be regarded as the solder
structural; therefore, it is inappropriate for broadcast efforts.
6.2.6.3 Welding of buffer holes or tears
Welds buffer can be used in holes or tears to transmit shear forces to
contact surfaces in connections to prevent buckling or superposition (or separation) of
overlapping parts and for connecting section bars compound. The diameter of the holes
for welding of buffer holes can not be less than the thickness of the part containing the
greater than 8 mm and not greater than 2.25 times the thickness of the weld. The center-tocenter-hole solder buffer must be equal to or greater than 4 times the hole diameter.
The length of solder tearing buffer slots can not be greater than 10 times the
weld thickness. The width of the slots can not be less than the thickness of the part containing the
greater than 8 mm and not greater than 2.25 times the thickness of the weld. The ends of these
Tears should be semicircular or shall have not less rounded corners radius to
thickness of the part containing them, except those ends which extend to the edge of
element soldier. The spacing between the centerlines of tears, measured in the direction
transverse to the length of the slots should be equal to or greater than 4 times the groove width. The
center-to-center slots located on the same longitudinal line the length of
thereof measured on this line should be equal to or greater than 2 times the length of the
Tears. The thickness of solder cap into holes or tears located in thick materials
Page 85
equal to or less than 16 mm should be equal to the thickness of the material. When the thickness of the
material is greater than 16 mm, the thickness of the weld shall be at least equal to half the
same material thickness, but not less than 16 mm.
6.3 Bolts and threaded round bars
The requirements of this standard refer specifically to ordinary bolts ASTM A307 and
high strength bolts to ASTM A325 and A490, with UNC thread. However, allows the
common use of ISO 898 Class 4.6 bolts and bolts of high-strength ASTM A325M,
ASTM A490M, ISO 898 and ISO 898 Class 8.8 Class 10.9, since for these screws,
all demands made for Similar ASTM screws are met, with the
mutatis mutandis. Are also provided round bar threaded, the threads must
meet the requirements of ASME B18.2.6 with Class 2A tolerance; nuts of round bars
must be the same threaded bar material and should have dimensions as specified
ASME B18.2.6 for hex nuts.
6.3.1 High-strength bolts
In bolted with high strength bolts requirements of connections must be met
subsection 6.7.
All high strength bolts must be tightened in order to develop a force
minimum prestressing, given in Table 16 and obtained as 6.7.4.1, except as follows,
where it is assumed the normal grip:
a) connections per contact in which the slip is allowed;
b) ASTM A325 bolts subject to tension or draw and cut when no fluctuations
loading causing fatigue or loosening the screws.
It is considered that normal tightening can be obtained by some to be a key impact
impact or the maximum effort of a worker using a normal key, always ensuring
firm contact between related parties. Screws mounted uncontrolled initial prestressing
shall be clearly indicated in the design drawings, fabrication and assembly.
6.3.2 Areas of calculation
6.3.2.1 Effective Area for contact pressure
The effective area and contact pressure of the screw is equal to the diameter of the screw multiplied
the plate thickness considered. Screws with countersunk head are not covered by this
85
Standard.
6.3.2.2 Effective Area of
bolt or threaded round bar, to draw
The tough area or effective area of
a screw or a threaded round bar (The
be) To
Traction is a value between the gross floor area and the root area of
the thread. This standard this
area is considered equal to 0.75 A b, Where Ab gross floor area, based on the diameter of the bolt or
outer diameter of the thread of threaded round bar, d
b. In short:
A=
be
075 The
b
Page 86
86

With:
The = d 2
b 4 b
6.3.3 Resistance Calculation in connections per contact

6.3.3.1 General
The resistance calculation, R Rd, The screws should be determined by the relationship between resistance
characteristic, R
And the weighting coefficient of resistance, . In determining the
Rk
request of computation for bolts subject to tension, in addition to external stresses must be
taken into account the leverage effect, if any, and exclude the prestressing force due to
tightening the screws.
The additional tensile force caused by the leverage effect in the case of standard holes can be
given by:
T
Q=
Sd
b 2
d
the+ b
2
b-
en 2f
y
444
Where:
TSdrequestor is the traction force calculation on the screw without leverage;
t is the smallest thickness t
1 et 2 connected plates (Figure 12);
f y is the lowest flow resistance of the plates connected (the process does not apply if the
value of f y the lower plate is greater than the thickness of the thicker plate);
bea are the dimensions shown in Figure 12 (if
a> 125 b , Should be useda = 125 b );
db is the diameter of the bolts;

p is the tributary width of the screw, is the sum of the effective widths of each
side of the bolt, defined as (figure 12):
- Effective width between two screws: the lesser of
and/ ( ) 2andb +
( 0 5,d ) ;
1
b
- and
Effective
+
) (2andbwidth
( 0 5,between
d ) ; end screw and the plate edge: the lesser of
b
If both p-values
shown in Figure 12 are different, use the lowest value.
T +.Q
Sd
The pulling force of total calculation, the screw is equal to
If the thickness t is less than t

mingiven below, this thickness is insufficient; the connection shall be
changed and recalculated the value of Q:
Page 87
min
87
b -( 0 d5 )
b
p- d
h
fp 1 +
y
p
444 T
Sd
where dh is the diameter of the hole.

Pd
the b
The
and
2
and
1
The
TSd+ Q
TSd+ Q
lower among
(E2) And (b + d 0.5
b)
p
p
and
1
t1
b the
lower among
(E1/ 2) and (b + d 0.5
b)
t2
and
2
Pd
Figure 12 - Leveraging
In the specific case of links to moment with top plate, requests traction in
Screws may be determined alternatively, according to the model of the hinges
plastic, adopted by Eurocode 3, Part 1.8 (View Joints in Steel Construction: Moment
Connections, SCI / BCSA, 1995), mutatis mutandis.
To bolted plates with 6.5.4 Filling see links.
6.3.3.2 Traction
The resistance calculation pulled with a round bar and a threaded end
Screw pulled, both with a diameter exceeding 12 mm, is given by
= 135 and
R
Where:
Rkt
= The f
be ub
Rkt
Where
/
f ub is the tensile strength of the material of the bolt or threaded round bar tensile
specified in Annex A;
The
beis the effective area, defined in 6.3.2.2.
In the case of the round bars threaded R
bar off the thread by flow resistance f
y.
Rktmust exceed the product of the area of
Page 88
88
6.3.3.3 Shear
The calculation of shear strength of a bolt or threaded round bar equals
Where
/
= 135 (Must also be satisfied in the above 6.3.3.4 and 6.3.5):
R
RKV
- For high strength bolts and threaded round bars, when the cutting plane
passes through the thread; common screws in any situation
R
= 0 4 Thef
RKV
b ub
- High strength bolts and threaded round bars, when the cutting plane does not
passes through the screw
R
= 0 5,Thef
RKV
b ub
Where:
f ub is the tensile strength of the material of the bolt or threaded round bar tensile
The
b is the gross floor area, based on the diameter of the bolt or threaded round bar, d
in 6.3.2.2.
The values
of resistors features are related to only one cutting plane.
6.3.3.4 contact pressure in boreholes
The resistance of calculating the contact pressure on the wall of a hole, already taking into account the
tear strength between two consecutive holes or between one end and the hole edge is
Where
/
= 135 and (must also be satisfied in the above 6.3.3.3 and 6.3.5):
given by R
Rkc
a) in the case of hole pattern, enlarged holes, little holes stretched in any direction and
very elongated holes in the direction of the force:
- When the deformation of the link to service requests is a consideration
project
R
=1 2 l
ft 2 4 d ft
Rkc
c u
b u
- When the deformation of the link to service requests is not a

design consideration
R
= 1 5,l
ft 3 0,d ft
Rkc
c u
b u
b) in the case of many holes elongated in the direction perpendicular to the force:
bGiven
R
Where:
= 1 0,l
ft 2 0,d ft
Rkc
c u
b u
Page 89
89
f u is the tensile strength tensile steel;

l c is the free distance in the direction of the force, between the edge of the hole and the edge of the adjacent hole
or the edge of the connected part;
db is the diameter of the screw;
t is the thickness of the connected part.
The use of extended holes and little holes or very elongated in the direction of force is restricted to
friction connections (see 6.3.4).
The total resistance is the sum of the resistances calculated contact pressure for all
holes.
In bolted at the ends of beams of souls connections, sized just for
effect of shear strength calculation requestor V
Sd (Without taking into account the moment due to
eccentricity), this shear force should be considered not only as to their actual direction
also perpendicular to this direction, to take into account the possibility of tearing of
soul between hole and edge.
6.3.3.5 Tensile and shear combined
When a bolt or threaded round bar is subjected to the simultaneous action of tensile and
shear, in addition to checking for two isolated efforts as 6.3.3.2, 6.3.3.3 and
6.3.3.4 must also be met the requirements of Table 11.
Table 11 - Tensile and shear force combined
Binding medium
Additional limitation of the resistance value

By calculation tensile bolt or bar
threaded round
R
ASTM A307 bolts
ASTM A325 bolts
ASTM A490 bolts

Round bars
Threaded general
Rkt
/ 073 f
ub
The - 190 V
b
Sd
/ 073 f The - 190 V

ub b
Sd
R
/ 073 f The - 150 V
Rkt
ub b
Sd
1)
/ 073 f The - 190 V

ub b
Sd
R
/ 073 f The - 150 V
Rkt
ub b
Sd
1)
Rkt
Rkt
Rkt
NOTES:
1)Cutting plane passing through the thread.
2)Cutting plane does not pass the thread.
/ 073 f
ub
The - 190 V
b
Sd
2)
2)
Table 11:
Page 90
90

f ub is the tensile strength of the material of the bolt or threaded round bar
The
b is the gross floor area, based on the diameter of the bolt or threaded round bar, d
in 6.3.2.2;
bGiven
VSd is the shear force in the plane of calculation considered the bolt or bar
round threaded.
6.3.4 Resistance calculation of high-strength bolts in friction connections
The project calls for friction with high strength bolts should be done as 6.3.4.1
and 6.3.4.2 and must still meet the 6.3.3 and 6.3.1.
6.3.4.1 Checking for shearing force calculation
Must
/
6.3.4.1.1 Resistance calculation of a screw to slip
R
be equal
rke1
and up to the shear force acting in the same calculation. The characteristic resistance, R
Is
Rke1
given by:
R
Rke1
= 113 T N
b s
Where:
Tb is the minimum prestressing force per bolt, given in Table 16;
Ns is the number of slip planes;
is the mean coefficient of friction, defined as follows:
- 0.33 for class A surfaces, that is, laminated surfaces clean and free from
oils or greases, unpainted;
- 0.50 for class B surfaces, ie sandblasted surfaces unpainted;
The minimum area of
contact surfaces that must be unpainted is
shown schematically in Figure 13.
Surfaces classes A and B can also be blasted and painted, since the
Average coefficient of friction is proven by tests according to
requirements of the "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts "; other values
of can also be established on the basis of such
trials.
- 0.35 for Class C surfaces, ie, hot galvanized surfaces with
increased manually by wire brush roughness (not allowed
use of machines).
Page 91
Area perimeter
contact
Circular area around
hole
Areas unpainted
db or 25 mm (whichever is greater)
dh
db or 25 mm (whichever is greater)
Area with paint
allowed
Figure 13 - Surface contact unpainted

The weighting coefficient of resistance, , is equal to:
- 1.00 for standard holes;
- 1.20 for extended or slightly elongated holes;
- 1.45 for holes very elongated cross request to stretching the hole;
- 1.65 for holes with very elongated request toward the hole stretching.
Wedges with a maximum thickness of 6 mm, still containing elongated holes up to a ledge
("Shims finger"), as shown in figure 14, can be used in friction connections with standard holes,
keeping the weighting coefficient of resistance equal to 1.00.
Figure 14 - Mounting plates with elongated holes to an edge
91
Page 92
92
6.3.4.1.2 When a frictional connection is subjected to tensile force N

SdWhich reduces the force
Given
/
prestressing, slip resistance,
R
in 6.3.4.1.1 should be
Rke1
multiplied by the following factor:
1-
Sd
113 T n
b b
Where:
NSdis the design value of the tensile strength that prompts the screw;
nb is the number of bolts that support the force N
Sd.
6.3.4.2 Checking for shearing force characteristic

6.3.4.2.1 resistance for calculating a slip the bolt is given by
the weighting coefficient of resistance, is equal to 1.00 and the characteristic resistance R
R
Rke2
Rke2
Where
/
Is:
Rke2
= F The
v b
Where:
F is the characteristic shear resistance using friction, given in Table 12; the
v
F values
v the table are based on Class A surfaces with friction coefficient
= 033 (For other types of surface, the value of F
v be obtained by
trials).
The
d in 6.3.2.2.
b is the gross floor area, based on the diameter of the screw,
bGiven
Table 12 - Resistance characteristic shear connections in friction, F
(Each cutting plane)
Screw type
Hole pattern
ASTM A325
ASTM A490
117
145
vIn megapascals
Very elongated holes

Holes and expanded
Perpendicular
little holes
Parallel to
to the direction of
elongated
direction of force
force
103
124
83
103
69
90
6.3.4.2.2 When a frictional connection is subjected to a pulling force, which reduces the strength of
Given
/
prestressing, slip resistance,
R
in 6.3.4.2.1 must be multiplied
Rke2
by the following factor:
1Where:
Sk
080 T n
b b
Page 93
93
NSkis the characteristic value of the tensile strength that prompts the screw;
nb is the number of bolts that support the force N
Sk.
6.3.5 Dimensions and use of holes

6.3.5.1 The maximum dimensions of holes shall conform to that indicated in Table 13, however,
Larger diameter holes can be used in support pillars plates to take into account
tolerances leasing anchors in concrete bases, using washers
specially sized for such a situation.
6.3.5.2 In bolted connections between bars should be used standard holes, unless it is
responsible for the project approved by the use of extended or elongated holes.
6.3.5.3 In connections with extended or elongated holes connection types should be observed
and allowed limits given in Table 14.
Table 13 - Maximum dimensions of holes for bolts and threaded round bars
Bore
bolt or bar
threaded round
db
the
etr
nses
andILIM
m
Dim
in
Page 94
Diameter
hole
standard
Bore
hole extended
24
d + 1 5,
b
d +5
b
27
28.5
33
30
d +8
b
d + / 16
3
b
A hole size
slightly elongated
d ( + 1 ) 5 d ( + ) 6
b
b
28
5, 35
A hole size
very elongated
d ( + 1 ),52 5,d
b
b
28
5, 67 5,
of
ga
and
nses
andlthe
7 8/
d + 1 5,
b
d + / 16
1
b
1 / 16
1
11 4/
d ( + 1 ),5 d ( + 9 ), 5
d ( + 1 ),5 2 d5
b
b
b
b
d ( + / 16
1 ) d ( + / 1 ) 4 d ( + / 16
1 ) 2 5,d
b
b
b
b
1 / 16
1 1 / 16
5
1 / 16
1 2 1 2 /
Dim
p
11 8 /
d + / 16
1
b
d + / 16
5
b
d ( + / 16
1 ) d ( + / 3) 8 d ( + / 16
1 ) 2 5,d
b
b
b
b
94

Table 14 - Limitations on the use of extended or elongated holes
Type
hole
Extended
Type
link
permitted
Friction
Friction
Little bit
elongate
By contact
Friction
Very
elongate
By contact
Limitations
Hole Position
In any or all
link plates
In any or all
connecting plates. Any
position regardless of
direction of the request
In any or all
link plates. More
dimension normal to the direction of
request
Washers 1)
Hardened over extended holes
plates in external link
About slightly elongated holes in
External link plates should
washers be used; such washers
must be hardened when
bolts are high strength.
Washers plate or flat bars

continuous, structural steel,
In only one of the parties
minimum thickness of 8mm and
binding to the same surface
hole pattern should be used
Contact. Any heading,
on very elongated holes in
regardless of the direction of
external plates. Such washers or
request
bars
should
have dimensions
sufficient to fully cover
The elongated holes after
installation of bolts. When
In only one of the parties
is necessary to use
washers
binding to the same surface
1)), These
hardened
(see
6.7.4.2
and
Contact. Larger
those
normal to the direction of the request will be placed on
washers plates or bars
Continuing
Note:
1) When screws are used ASTM A490 greater than 25.4 mm diameter holes or elongated in
expanded, the external link plates, hardened washers should be used in accordance with ASTM F436,
However, the minimum thickness of 8 mm instead of the standard washers.
6.3.6 Handle long and very long bonds
Except in cases of high strength bolts, fitted with initial prestressing, when the
length exceeds handle
5 d the required number of screws or round bars
b
Threaded should be increased by 1 for each additional 1.5 percent mm handle (d
diameter of the screw or threaded round bar). When connections contact, used in
amendments tensile bar, have a length exceeding 1270 mm in the direction of
external force, the shear force requestor calculation, V
Sd, The bolts and the request
calculation used to verify the contact pressure in boreholes shall be multiplied by 1.25 to
taking into account the non-uniform distribution of the external force by the screws.
b is
6.3.7 Minimum spacing between holes

The distance between centers of standard holes, extended or elongated, may not be less than
rather
3,dwhere d
b
b screw diameter round bar or screw.
2 7d ,
b
Page 95
95
Beyond this requirement, the clear distance between the edges of two consecutive holes can not be
lower ad b.
6.3.8 Minimum distance from one hole to the edges
6.3.8.1 Standard Holes
The distance from the center of a standard hole to any edge of a connected part can not be
less than the value shown in Table 15, in which d
b is the screw diameter or round bar
threaded.
Extended or elongated holes 6.3.8.2
The distance from the center of an extended or elongated hole at any edge of a connected party did not
may be less than the value specified for standard holes, given in Table 15, plus d
b being
db screw diameter and defined as follows:
-
= 0 for holes elongated in the direction parallel to the edge considered;
= 012 for enlarged holes;
considered;
= 020 for holes slightly elongated in the direction perpendicular to the edge
= 075 holes to very elongated in the direction perpendicular to the edge

considered (the length of the elongated hole is much lower than that given in Table 13, the
d product
can be reduced by an amount equal to half the difference between the
b
length given in the table and the actual length).
Table 15 - Minimum Distance
Diameter d b
Inch
Millimeter
1/2
5/8
3/4
16
7/8
20
22
24
1
1 1/8
27
30
1 1/4
> 1 1/4
36
> 36
1) the center of a hole pattern to the edge

Edge cut with
saw or scissors
(Mm)
22
29
32
35
38 3)
42 3)
44
50
53
57
64
1.75 d b
Or rolled edge
cut the torch
(Mm)
19
22
26
27
29
31
32
38
39
42
46
1.25 d b
NOTES:
1)Inferior to the table distances are permitted provided that the equations apply to 6.3.3.4 are met.
2)In this column, the distances can be reduced by 3 mm, when the hole is at a point where the request
calculation does not exceed 25% of the resistance calculation.
3)At the ends of ledges connecting beams and end plates for flexible connections, this
distance can be equal to 32 mm.
Page 96
96
6.3.9 Maximum spacing between holes and maximum distance from one hole to the edges
2)
6.3.9.1 For any edge of a connected part, the distance from the center of the screw (or bar
Round Threaded) closest to that edge may not exceed 12 times the thickness of the part
considered connected or 150 mm.
6.3.9.2 The maximum spacing between bolts connecting one plate to a profile or other
plate in continuous contact, shall be determined as follows.
a) on elements not subject to corrosion, painted or not, the spacing may not exceed
24 times the thickness of the thinnest part connected or 300 mm;
b) for elements of atmospheric corrosion resistant steel, unpainted, the spacing
can not exceed 14 times the thickness of the thinnest connected part, or 180 mm.
6.4 Pins
6.4.1 General
The bending moments on a pin must be calculated assuming that the contact stresses
between the pin and the connected parts are uniformly distributed throughout the thickness
each part. If the pin passes through plates with a thickness greater than half the diameter of the
pin, one should take into account the variation of the contact stresses through the thickness of
plates and the bending moments are determined at pin according to this Distribution
tensions.
6.4.2 Resistance calculation
6.4.2.1 Resistance of calculating flexural
Where
/
Resistance calculation pin the bending moment is given by
M
the coefficient
Rk
weighting the resistance, is equal to 1.10 and the characteristic resistance M
Rkis:
M
Rk
=12 W f
where W is the elastic modulus of the resilient pin section f

Pin material.
y is the flow resistance
6.4.2.2 Resistance of calculating the shear force

Where
/
The resistance of calculating the shear pin is given by
V
the coefficient
Rk
weighting the resistance, is equal to 1.10 V and the characteristic resistance
Rkis:
V=
Rk
060 The f
w y
where Aw is the effective area of

the shear pin section, equal to 0.75 A
Gross pin ef
is
the
yield
strength
of the material of the pin.
y
g, Where Ag is area
Page 97
6.4.2.3 Resistance to crushing calculation
Where
/
Resistance calculation pin crushing is given by
R
the coefficient
Rk
weighting the resistance, is equal to 1.35 and the characteristic resistance R
is:
97
Rk
= 1 f5
Rk
y
where fy is the yield strength of the material of the pin.

The request of calculation to be considered is the maximum contact stress calculation for
uniform distribution or not.
6.5 Connection elements
6.5.1 General
This subsection shall apply to the design of connection elements, such as:
stiffeners, connecting plates, angles, consoles and all parts of the connected parts,
locally affected by the binding.
6.5.2 eccentric Links
Axes passing through the centers of gravity of the cross sections of axially bars
and are applied in a node should preferably intersect at a common point.
Otherwise, should be taken into account the time and the shear force due to
eccentricity on the link.
6.5.3 Elements of calculation
6.5.3.1 General Rule
All connecting elements (including the affected parts of bars) must be dimensioned
Corresponding
/
so that their resistance calculation
R
to each applicable limit state,
Rk
is greater than or equal to the respective requests calculation.
Particular attention should be given in the sizing of joints to avoid
All possible types of buckling in the connection region. For serviceability limit states
disposing of gross section and rupture of the net section, the stresses acting calculation,
determined based on combinations of shares for calculating (or the strength requirements
minimum link) and based on the effective resistance regions (net areas can not
be taken greater than 85% of the corresponding gross areas), may not exceed
resistance following calculation:
a) for the disposal by normal stresses
= 110
Rk
=f
b) for the flow of shear stresses

= 110
Rk
= 0 f6
y
Page 98
98

c) to damage by normal stresses
= 135
Rk
=f
d) to disruption by shear stresses
= 135
R Rk = 0 f6u
where fy is the yield strength f
u the tensile strength of the material tensile strength.
In welded joints, tension calculation in the binding elements in the zone adjacent to the weld,
can be determined by inverse proportion to the thickness of the base metal and (s)
throat (s) Effective (s) of the weld, provided that such tensions be contained in the elements through
thickness thereof.
In checking rupture of flange plates must be used effective net area when
applicable, as stated in 5.2.
6.5.3.2 Breakdown by tearing
Collapse by tearing out is a state in which the resistance is determined by the sum of
resistance to shear on a fault line and tensile strength in a segment
perpendicular. Should be checked with the connections at ends of beams with table
cropped to fit and in similar situations, such as tensile bars and gussets
(Figure 15). When the tensile breaking strength of the net section is used to determine
the resistance of a segment, the outflow of gross shear section is used in
perpendicular segment and vice versa. The resistance of calculating the collapse is given by tearing
by R Rk/ , where is the weighting coefficient of resistance equal to 1.35 and R
Rk is the resistance
f The 0 f6 The
u nt
u nv
a) when
R
Rk
f The < 0 f6 The

u nt
u nv
b) when
R
= 0 [ f6,The + f The ] 0 [ f6,The + f The ]

y gv u nt
u nv u nt
Rk
= [ 0 f6 The + f The ] [ 0 f6 The + f The ]

u nv y gt
u nv u nt
Where:
The
gv is the gross area subject to shear;
The
gt is the gross area subjected to tension;
The
nv is the net area subject to shear;
The
nt is the net area subject to tension.
In situations like those shown in Figures 15 and e-15-f, the superposition of high values
of
normal and shear the base metal adjacent to the weld stresses in the plates A and B,
Page 99
respectively, necessitates the application of a criterion for determining the resistance
equivalent voltages; however, alternatively, one can determine the tension in the calculation
regions of base metal adjacent to the weld, multiplying the stresses resulting from the calculation in welding
per second
(For
/ t plate A) and 2a/2t
The
B (For sheet B), considering the tensions thus obtained
as shear, regardless of its direction, being aa effective throat of the weld
fillet.
99
The
t
The
v
The
t
The
t
The
v
The
v
(B)
(A)
The
v
The
The
t
(C)
t The
The
B
(D)
(E)
(TThe
etBare thicknesses of)
(F)
Figure 15 - Examples of collapse by tearing

6.5.4 Filling Plates
6.5.4.1 In the welded connections, any filler plate thickness equal to or greater than
6 mm must extend beyond the edges of the connecting plate and be welded to the part where it should be
fixed, enough to transmit the force acting on the calculation sheet solder connection,
eccentric load applied to the surface of the filler plate (Figure 16). Welds that
connecting the connection plate to the plate filler should be sufficient to impart the strength of
calculation that acts on the connecting plate and be of sufficient length so that it is not
calculating overcome the resistance of the plate filler along the edge of the weld.
When the thickness of the filler is less than 6 mm, the edges must coincide
with the edges of the connecting plate and the size of the leg of the weld bead should be equal to
sum of the size of the leg needed to transmit the force acting on the calculation sheet
connection with the thickness of the filling (Figure 17).
Page 100
100

3
3
May be used
transverse welds
along
edges indicated
Figure 16 - Filling with thickness exceeding 6 mm plate
t < 6 mm
2
May be used
transverse welds
along
edges indicated
t
Effective dimension
Real size
Figure 17 - filler plate with a thickness of 6 mm
6.5.4.2 When filling plates with standard holes are used in bolted connections, and
Such plates have a sum T
s thickness not exceeding 6 mm, the resistance calculation
shear bolts may be used without reduction. If t
exceeds 6 mm, must meet
s
one of the following requirements:
- When t
s is equal to or less than 19 mm, the resistance calculation of shear bolts
(And crush) on contact connections shall be multiplied by the factor
1 -[ 00157 t ( - 6)] , Where ts taken in millimeters;
s
- Filling the plates should extend beyond the bonding material, and that extension
must have enough screws to distribute the total force that acts on the number
support element, uniformly over the section of this combined support element and
filling (see Figure 18);
Page 101
101
- Instead of the extension, may be added in the link, a number of screws

equivalent to that provided in b) (see Figure 18 in which the forces in groups
screws correspond to the resulting contact forces applied on the screws
plates).
Screws required if
there was no filler
Screws
F1 force
F1
F1
t1(Thickness of the filler)

F1
F2
t2 (Thickness of the support element)
Alternative lengthening
of binder material
F
F + F = And F1 =
1 2
t
1
F2
t
2
Figure 18 - Plate filling in bolted

6.6 contact pressure
6.6.1 Resistance to contact pressure
The resistance calculation, R
Rk/ , the surfaces in contact depends on the various forms and
conditions such areas as indicated in 6.6.2 to 6.6.5.
6.6.2 Machined Surfaces
In machined surfaces, including the case of ends for fitting with stiffeners
contact with the table and the case pin through mandrilados or drilled holes, one takes the
weighting coefficient of resistance, , equal to 1.35 and the characteristic resistance
crushing, U.S.
, Equal to:
Rk
R
Rk
= 1 8 Thef
Where:
A is the contact area (projected area where pins);
f y is the lowest flow resistance of the parts in contact.
6.6.3 not machined surfaces
In non-machined surfaces, the pressure transmission to be done by weldment.
To determine the resistance of calculation see 6.2 and 6.5.
Page 102
102
6.6.4 Apparatus massive cylindrical support on flat surfaces machined

The resistance of calculating the contact pressure apparatus cylindrical solid support on
Machined flat surfaces to be obtained using the weighting coefficient of resistance, ,
equal to 1.35 and a crush strength characteristic of the cylinder, R
Rk, Equal to:
- Is
R
d 635 mm
1 2 f ( - ) l d
y
Rk
20
- Is
d> 635 mm
6 0, f ( - ) l
dd
R Rk =
20
aux
Where:
d is the diameter of the cylinder;
f y is the lowest flow resistance of the parts in contact;
= 90 MPa (With proper conversion when another unit);
l is the length of the cylinder;
d
aux
= 25 4 mm (With proper conversion when another unit).
6.6.5 Contact pressure on concrete supports

The resistance of calculating the contact pressure in the area 1 the area under the load bearing plates,
is determined using the weighting coefficient of resistance, equal to 1.65 (the
request calculation shall be expressed in terms of compressive stress).
The characteristic resistance, R Rk, Assuming that, on the face opposite to that of the concrete in contact
with the backplate, the pressure is distributed across the face area and such that the distance between
opposite sides is the largest of the three main dimensions of concrete block, is given by (Figure
19)
a) when the concrete surface extends beyond the support plate and its outline is
homothetic with respect to the charged region:
R
Rk
= 085 f
Where:
The
2 170 f
ck The
ck
1
f ckis the characteristic compressive strength of concrete;

The
1 is loaded under the bearing plate area;
Page 103
103
The
the concrete;
2 is the surface area of
b) when the contours are not homothetic, the R value
Rk can be determined by
above expression, however, the area A shall be calculated as shown in Figure 19.
2
The
The
The
1
Area
charged
Homothetic Outline
relative to the 1
Plant
Load
The loaded area
2
1
The
2
Section AA
Figure 19 - Pressure contact on concrete supports
6.7 Design, assembly and inspection of connections with high strength bolts
6.7.1 General
6.7.1.1 This subsection refers to the design, assembly and inspection of connections made
with
high strength bolts ASTM A325 and ASTM A490.
6.7.1.2 Connections to reassign forces parallel to the contact surface of the parties
can be connected frictionally or, alternatively, by contact. The connections in which
slip is highly harmful and those that are subject to repetitive forces with
sign reversal should be friction.
Page 104
104
6.7.2 Bolts, nuts and washers

6.7.2.1 The bolts shall be in accordance with the current specifications of ASTM
A325 "Standard specification for structural bolts, steel, heat-treated, 120/105 ksi minimum
tensile strength ", or ASTM A490" Standard specification for heat-treated steel structural
Bolts, 150 ksi minimum tensile strength. " The ASTM A325 specification provides for three types of
high strength bolts, one with atmospheric corrosion resistance comparable to
ASTM A588 steel. The responsibility for the project must specify the type of screws to be
used. For requirements relating to the use of ASTM A325 galvanized bolts, see ASTM
A325; ASTM A490 bolts can not be galvanized.
6.7.2.2 The dimensions of the screws shall be in accordance with the current specifications
ASME B18.2.6 for heavy structural bolts, hex head. The length of
bolt should be such that, after installation, its end coincides with or exceeds the face
outer nut; This is necessary to provide a clearance in the calculation of length, so
compensate for the tolerances of the bolt and the implementation structure.
6.7.2.3 The dimensions of the nuts shall be in accordance with the current specifications of
ASME B18.2.6 for heavy hex nuts.
6.7.2.4 other types of fasteners may be used, provided they meet the requirements for
material, manufacturing process and constant chemical composition of ASTM
ASTM A325 or A490, that meet the requirements of mechanical properties of these same
specifications, with evidence for full-scale testing, and also having
stem diameter and the contact areas under the head and nut, or its equivalent, of not less
values
corresponding to the requirements of 6.7.2.2 and 6.7.2.3 for a bolt and nut
same nominal dimensions. The installation methods and inspection may differ from the indicated
respectively in 6.7.4.3, 6.7.4.4, 6.7.4.5 and 6.7.5; in this case, such methods should be
documented by detailed specification, subject to the approval of the engineer responsible for
Project.
6.7.2.5 The circular washers and square beveled washers shall be
accordance with the latest specifications of ASTM F436 "Standard Specification for
Hardened Steel Washers. " The dimensions of the washers are specified in ASME B18.2.6.
6.7.3 Bolted Parts
6.7.3.1 hardened beveled washers shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallelism,
when one of the outer surfaces of bolted parts have more than 1:20 slope in
relative to the normal to the axis of the screw plane. The bolt parts of the structure can not be
separated by any materials other than structural steel, and must be fully
contact when assembled. The holes can be punched, subpuncionados and extended, or
drilled.
6.7.3.2 When assembled, all the connection surfaces, including adjacent to the head
screws, nuts and washers, shall be free from lamination scales (except those
firmly adhered to the material), burrs, dirt or other foreign matter that
prevent perfect contact between the parties.
6.7.3.3 The contact surfaces in friction connections shall meet the above in 6.3.4.1.
Page 105
105
6.7.4 Install the screws

6.7.4.1 Strength minimum prestressing tightening
The high-strength bolts must be tightened so as to obtain a minimum strength
prestressing (Tb) Appropriate to each type and diameter of screw used independently of the link
be friction or contact, except in situations referred 6.3.1. This prestressing force is
provided in Table 16 for the screws and ASTM equivalent to approximately 70% of
characteristic tensile strength of the bolt, given in 6.3.3.2. The grip should be applied by
the rotation of the nut, the calibrated wrench, or direct indicator traction method (see 6.7.4.3,
6.7.4.4 and 6.7.4.5).
Table 16 - Minimum Force in prestressing bolts ASTM
Diameter d b
Inch
1/2
5/8
Tb (KN)
Millimeter
16
3/4
ASTM A325
ASTM A490
53
85
91
125
66
106
114
156
20
22
7/8
24
1
27
1 1/8
30
1 1/4
36
1 1/2
142
176
173
205
227
267
250
326
317
475
460
179
221
216
257
283
334
357
408
453
595
659
If necessary, depending on the conditions of access to the screw and the clearances for handling
tool, the grip can be given by turning the bolt head and preventing the nut from rotating.
When impact wrenches are used, their capacity should be adequate and its supply
Air should be sufficient to obtain the desired tightening of each bolt
approximately 10 seconds.
6.7.4.2 Washers
In addition to the requirements 6.7.3.1 and table 14, hardened washers must be used
in the following situations:
a) under the turning element (nut or screw head) during fastening, where
A490 screws tightened by rotating the nut and method in the case of screws A325
A490 calibrated or tightened with the key (that is, torque control);
b) in which the element does not rotate during tightening, in the case of A490 bolts, when the
element is based on a structural steel with lower resistance to flow
280 MPa .
Page 106
106
6.7.4.3 Tightening by the rotation of the nut method

When using the method of tightening by turning the nut to apply the prestressing force
specified in Table 16, there must be sufficient minimum number of screws provided
pre-torque, to ensure that the parties are in full contact. The condition of pre-torque
is defined as the tightness obtained after a few impacts applied by an impact wrench, or
the maximum force applied by a worker using a normal key. After this operation
initial, screws should be placed in the remaining holes and screws also led to such
pre-torque condition. All connecting bolts should then get a grip
Further, through the rotation of the nut applies, as indicated in Table 17, which must
begin operation in the most rigid part of the connection and proceed toward the free edges.
During this operation, the opposite side to that which applies in the rotation can not rotate.
6.7.4.4 Key Grip with calibrated
When calibrated keys are used, they must be adjusted to provide a prestressing
at least 5% higher than the minimum prestressing given in Table 16. keys must be calibrated
at least once per working day for each bolt diameter to install. They should
be recalibrated when significant changes are made to the equipment or when
noticed a significant difference in the surface of bolts, nuts and washers.
Calibration should be done by tightening three typical bolts of each diameter, removed
Lot of bolts to be installed in a device capable of indicating the real draw in
screw. For calibration must be certified that during the installation of bolts in the structure,
calibration
doesgreater
not produce
a rotation
of in
theTable
nut or17.
bolt
head from
the are used to
position
of chosen
pre-torque,
than that
indicated
manuals
If keys
torque wrench, when torque is reached the nuts should be tightening move.
During the installation of several screws on the wire, those already tight previously
should be tested with the key and tightened if they "loose" during the handshake
subsequent bolts, until all bolts reach the desired tightness.
Page 107
107
Table 17. Rotation of the nut from the pre-torque position

Provision of the outer surfaces of bolted parts
Length
Screw (measured from
bottom of the
Head to the end)
Less than or equal to 4
diameters
Over 4 diameters
up to a maximum of 8
diameter, including
Over 8 diameters
no later than 12
diameters 2)
Both sides
normal to the axis of
screw
One of ordinary faces

the axis of the screw and
another inclined face
not more than 1:20
(No beveled washer)
Third back
Half back
Half back
2/3 back
2/3 back
5/6 back
Both sides
inclined to
the plane normal to the
no screw shaft
more than 1:20 (without
beveled washers)
2/3 back
5/6 back
1 back
NOTES:
1)The rotation of the nut is considered in relation to the screw, without regard to the element being
rotated (nut or bolt). To install with 1/2 turn or less screws, tolerance in the rotation is more
30 or less, screw installed with 2/3 turn and more, the tolerance on the rotation is more or less
45th.
2)No research has been done to establish the procedure to be used for tightening the rotation of the method
nut to wavelengths greater than diameters screws 12. Therefore, the required rotation should be
determined by tests on a suitable device that measures strength, simulating the actual conditions.
6.7.4.5 Tightening by using a direct indicator of traction

It allowed tighten screws by using a direct indicator of drift, since it can be
demonstrated for an accurate method of direct measurement, the screw was subjected to the force
minimum prestressing given in Table 16, after tightening.
6.7.4.6 Reuse of bolts
The A490 bolts and galvanized A325 bolts can not be reused.
The other A325 bolts may be reused once, if an engineer's approval
responsible. The tightening screw is tightened and that previously loosen during
tightening screws neighbors is not considered as reuse.
6.7.5 Inspection
6.7.5.1 The inspector shall ensure that, for all the work, the requirements of 6.7.2 are met,
6.7.3 and 6.7.4. The inspector shall have free access to monitor the calibration switches as
prescribed in 6.7.4.4.
6.7.5.2 The inspector shall observe the installation of bolts to determine if the procedure
clamping was chosen being followed properly and should verify that all
screws are tight. Bolts tightened by rotating the nut method can achieve
protentions substantially higher than those recommended in Table 16, but are
reason for rejection.
Page 108
108
6.7.5.3 When using the method of direct indicator of drift, the inspector should observe the
installation of bolts to determine whether the tightening procedure that is approved
being used properly and should verify that the correct tensioning was achieved according to the table
16.
6.7.5.4 When there are differences of opinion as to the results of the inspection force
obtained by the method of prestressing rotation of the nut or calibrated key, the next inspection
arbitration shall be used unless another procedure has been specified:
a) the inspector must use a key inspection with a torque wrench;
b) three screws of the same type, diameter (whose length is representative
Screws used in the structure) and conditions of those under inspection shall be
placed individually in a calibration device capable of indicating the tension in
screw. The under surface of the part to be rotated during tightening of each screw must be
equal to the corresponding surface of the structure, that is, there must be a washer under part
turning if washers are used in the structure, or, if these are not used, the material
adjacent to the part that spins must be of the same specification of the corresponding material in
structure;
c) each bolt specified in b), must be tightened in the calibration device
by any convenient method to reach an initial condition with approximately
15% of the amount of prestressing required for the bolt in the table 16 and then up to the
value of that prestressing. Tightening given after the initial condition may not result in
rotation greater than that permitted in Table 17 nut. A key inspection should then be
applied to the screw was tightened and should be given the necessary torque to
rotating the nut or head 5 degrees in the direction of tightening. The average torque obtained from the
trials of three screws should be taken as torque inspection of the work to be used in the
manner specified in paragraph d) below;

d) screws as represented by the sample obtained in b), and have been
tight structure, must be inspected by applying, in the tightening direction, the
switch inspection and its corresponding torque inspection of the work; This should be done at 10%
bolts, but not less than two randomly chosen on each link.
If no nut or bolt head spin by applying torque inspection
work, the connection should be accepted as properly tightened. If any nut or head
screw by turning torque application inspection, this torque should be applied to
all bolts connection and all bolts whose nut or head spin by
applied torque inspection of the work should be tightened and reinspected or
alternatively, the manufacturer or assembler, your choice, you can tighten all
screws on the link, resubmetendo it to the specified inspection.
7 Specific conditions for the design of steel-composite elements
concrete
7.1 The mixed steel-concrete structural elements provided by this standard are beams, columns and
slabs.
7.2 The dimensions of the steel-concrete composite beams must be done in accordance with the
requirements of Annex Q.
Page 109
7.3 Sizing of steel-concrete composite columns must be done in accordance with the
requirements of Annex A.
7.4 The dimensions of the steel-concrete composite slabs must be made
according to the
requirements of Annex S.
8 Specific conditions for the design of composite joints
The design of mixed steel-concrete connections must be made according to the
requirements of Annex T.
9 Additional Considerations resistance
9.1 General
In addition to the requirements of sections 5, 6, 7 and 8, other aspects of resistance must be considered
under certain conditions, among which are: fatigue, puddling, brittle fracture and
elevated temperatures.
9.2 Fatigue
9.2.1 Bars and connections subject to the effects of fatigue should be sized according to the
requirements of Annex M.
9.2.2 Rarely bars or links in non-industrial buildings need to be scaled
to fatigue, since the variations in the structures of action of these buildings occur only one
small number of times during the useful life or produce only small
voltage fluctuations.
109
9.2.3 The and

occurrence
peak effects
in buildings,
or However,
earthquake,
is of littlebrackets cranes
frequency
does notofdeserve
considerations
of wind
fatigue.
structures
and machines are often subject to fatigue conditions.
9.3 puddling
When the slope of a roof or floor of a building subject to receipt of water
rain is less than 3%, further checks must be made to ensure that no
occur structural collapse caused by the dead weight of accumulated water by virtue of the arrows
of closure and structural components (see 11.6) materials.
9.4 brittle fracture
In some situations the links and details are subject to triple states traction caused by
notches, residual stresses, etc.. especially at low temperatures, fracture may occur
fragile. To avoid this type of boundary condition, it is necessary that the design be used
intrinsically ductile details. Abrupt transitions should be avoided, residual stresses
excessive and excessively thick welded materials.
9.5 High temperatures
The structures of steel and must be mixed, if necessary, scaled to the effects
high operating temperatures or accidental origin (such as fires). In this
Page 110
110
latter case, the sizing should be done in case of fire according to NBR
14323.
10 Additional conditions of project
10.1 General
Should be included in the design considerations regarding contraflechas, protection
corrosion of steel components and durability.
10.2 Contraflechas
10.2.1 The contraflechas as necessary should be indicated in the design drawings.
Generally, the trusses span less than 24 m, contraflechas should be applied
approximately equal to the arrow resulting from direct permanent characteristic actions. For
beams bearing go less than 20 m, generally should be given equal contraflecha
the arrow resulting from direct permanent features 50% more shares of stock variables
characteristics. Any other contraflechas, for example, needed for compatibility
deformations of the structure with the elements finish the work, shall be determined
the specific cases treated.
10.2.2 The beams and trusses that are detailed without indication contraflecha should be
constructed so that small deformations resulting from the manufacture or rolling,
face up after assembly. If the application of contraflecha require the
structure element is mounted under strain imposed by external means, it should be
shown on the assembly drawings.
10.3 Corrosion on steel components
10.3.1 The steel components of the structure shall be designed to tolerate corrosion or
must be protected against corrosion that can affect your strength or your
performance of the structure.
10.3.2 Protection against corrosion in non-resistant steels to atmospheric corrosion can be

obtained by protective layers, or other effective means, either alone or in combination.
Corrosion resistant steels should also be protected when it is not guaranteed to training
the protective film or when the thickness loss expected during the useful life is not
tolerable. Alternatively, an adequate for corrosion can be used for
expected life for the building and the aggressiveness of the medium.
10.3.3 The localized corrosion is likely to occur when there is retention of water condensation
excessive, or caused by other factors, should be minimized by design and detailing
appropriate. Where necessary, efficient water drainage should be provided.
10.3.4 If the protection specified for structures exposed to weather corrosion, or
other environments where corrosion can occur gradually, requiring maintenance or renewal
during the life of the structure (see 10.4), thus protected, the steel should have a
Minimum thickness of 5 mm (excluding steel formwork of steel-concrete composite slabs, wedges
plates and filling).
Page 111
111
10.3.5 The internal environment of buildings, conditioned for human comfort can be
generally considered as non-corrosive. However, the need for protection against
corrosion should be evaluated in each case and, if necessary, this protection should be given.
10.3.6 Protection against corrosion on the internal surfaces of parts whose interior is
permanently sealed against the penetration of external oxygen is considered unnecessary.
10.4 Guidelines for durability
10.4.1 The steel and composite structures must be designed and constructed so that under the
environmental conditions at the time of the project, and when used as recommended
in design, retain the security, stability and fitness in service during the period
corresponding to its life.
10.4.2 For the design life means the time period during which keep the
characteristics of the structures, since it met the requirements of use and prescribed maintenance
by the designer and the builder, as well as implementing the necessary repairs resulting from
environmental damage.
10.4.3 The concept of life applies to the structure as a whole or its parts. Thus,
certain parts of the structure may deserve special consideration with lifetime value
all different.
10.4.4 To ensure that the structure maintains its characteristics during life
project, the steel elements, including the members of the joint structures should be
adequately protected against corrosion (see 10.3), and any other factors of aggressiveness,
when this is necessary, and that such protection must undergo an inspection process
periodic. Pieces of concrete and your equipment, members of the joint structures should
obey related to the durability requirements of ISO 6118.
10.4.5 Depending on the size of the building and the aggressiveness of the environment and in possession of
project information, materials and products used and the execution of the work should be
produced by a qualified professional user information, inspection and maintenance. This
manual should specify clearly and objectively the basic requirements for use and
preventive maintenance necessary to ensure the expected service life for the structure.
11 limit states
11.1 General
The occurrence of a limit state can impair the appearance, the possibility of
maintenance, durability, functionality and comfort of the occupants of a building, as well
as it can cause damage to equipment and finishing materials linked to the building.
11.2 Basis for Project
11.2.1 The limits to be imposed on the behavior of the structure values, and ensuring their
Full use should be chosen taking into account the functions assigned to the structure
and materials related to it.
11.2.2 Each limit state should be checked using combinations of actions
of use (see 4.7.3) associated with the type of response studied.
Page 112
112
11.3 Shifts
11.3.1 The structure of the displacement bar and sets of structural elements,
including floors, roofs, partitions, exterior walls, etc.., may not exceed the values
limits set out in Annex C.
11.3.2 The lateral displacements of the structure and the horizontal relative movements between floors,
due to combinations of actions to use (see 4.7.3) can not cause collision with
adjacent buildings, nor exceed the limit values
laid down in Annex C.
11.4 Vibrations
11.4.1 Beams restraints floors of large areas that do not have partition walls or other
forms of damping, transient vibrations due to which people may be walking
unacceptable should be dimensioned taking into consideration this type of vibration,
as Annex W.
11.4.2 Mechanical equipment that may produce undesirable continuous vibration should
be insulated to reduce or eliminate the transmission of such vibrations to the structure.
Vibrations of this type should be taken into account also in the verification of limit states
past, including fatigue. Other sources of continuous vibration are vehicles and activities
human such as dance. See Appendix W for limit states and Annex M to
fatigue.
11.4.3 For vibrations due to wind, see Annex X. Vibrations of this kind should be taken
into account also the verification of the ultimate limit states, including fatigue (see Annex B,
subsection B.4 and Annex M).
11.5 Dimensional Changes
Measures should be taken so that the dimensional variations of a structure and its
elements, due to temperature variations and other effects do not affect the use of
structure.
11.6 puddling of water on roofs and floors
11.6.1 All roofs and floors of buildings subject to the receipt of rain water,
less than 5% slope, should be checked to ensure that water will not be
accumulate in puddles. This finding should be taken into account possible inaccuracies
constructive and settlements of foundation, arrows of closing materials and components
Structural including the effects of contraflecha.
11.6.2 Contraflechas beams can contribute significantly to prevent puddling,
as well as the placement of exit points of water in adequate number and positions.
11.7 Cracking of concrete
11.7.1 In composite beams, tensile stresses in the concrete slab can cause cracks that
undermine the protection of armor for corrosion or adversely affect the appearance or
the use of the building.
Page 113
11.7.2 The related control requirements of the cracks that may occur in conditions
cited in 11.7.1, are in Annex U.
12 Manufacturing, assembly and quality control
12.1 General
12.1.1 Documents Project
All project documents must meet the minimum requirements of section 4.
12.1.2 standardized symbols and nomenclature
Indicative welding symbols used in the drawings and inspection requirements of the structure
must comply with the AWS Standards.
12.1.3 Changes in project
The changes that are necessary in the project, during the stages of manufacture or
assembly of the structure shall be made only with the permission of the head of the project,
Relevant technical documents should be corrected consistently with those
modifications.
12.2 Manufacture of structure and paint factory
12.2.1 Manufacture
12.2.1.1 desempeo material
12.2.1.1.1 Prior to its use in manufacturing, laminated materials must be straightened
within the tolerances of supply. If these tolerances are not being met, it is
allowed to perform corrective work by the use of controlled heating and / or straightening
mechanics, subject to the limitations of this standard. Heating and mechanical means are also
Allowed to obtain the desired pre-deformation.
12.2.1.1.2 The temperature of the heated area, measured by approved methods should not be
exceeding 650 C for steels permitted use by this standard.
113
12.2.1.2 Cut by thermal means

The edges cut by thermal means shall meet the requirements of paragraph 5.15.4 of AWS
D1.1: 2002, with the exception of the free edges that are subject to static tensile stress, which
shall be free of depressions deeper than 5 mm and slots. Depressions
greater than 5 mm and notches shall be removed by grinding or repaired by welding.
The reentrant corners, except the clippings beam table for connections and openings
access for welding must comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.16 AWS D1.1: 2002. If other
requirement is specified, it must be contained in the contract documents.
Clippings beam table for connections and access openings for welding must
meet the geometric requirements given in 6.1.14. Moreover, when these cut-outs or
openings are executed profiles of Groups 4 and 5 of ASTM A6/A6M or profiles
Page 114
114
welded with a thickness exceeding 50 mm materials should be given a pre-heating

temperature at least 66 C before cutting.
12.2.1.3 Planing edges
No need to flatten or finishing the edges of plates or profiles cut with a saw,
scissors or torch, unless otherwise indicated on drawings or
preparing specifications edges. The use of scissors to cut edges should be avoided
in places subject to the formation of plastic hinges; if used, these edges should be
smooth finish, obtained by grinding, gouge or planer. The burrs should be removed to
allow adjustment of parts to be bolted or welded or when they represent
risk during construction or after its completion.
12.2.1.4 Bolted Construction
12.2.1.4.1 When the thickness of the material is less than or equal to the maximum diameter of
plus 3 mm, screw holes can be punched. For larger thicknesses, the holes
should be drilled to its final diameter and can also be subpuncionados or subdrilled with smaller diameter and subsequently machined to final diameter. The matrix for
all subpuncionados holes or drill for all sub-drilled holes shall be at
least 3.5 mm less than the final diameter of the hole. In places subject to the formation of bearings
plastic, the holes should be tensioned areas subpuncionados and machined to the diameter
end or drilled with the final diameter. When applicable, this requirement should be included in the
drawings of the structure. The use of a torch for drilling holes is not allowed.
12.2.1.4.2 During bolting, pins or screws should be placed provisional to
maintaining the relative position of the structural parts prior to their final fixation. Espinas can only
be used to ensure the positioning of the component parts during the sets
assembly is not allowed to use, by deformation force of the coincidence
holes, extend them, or distort the material. Insufficient coincidence holes should be of
rejection of parts. The assembly and inspection of connections with high strength bolts must
be made in accordance with 6.7.
12.2.1.5 welded construction
The technique to be used in welding, execution, appearance and quality of welds, and
as the methods used in the correction of defects shall be in accordance with AWS D 1.1.
12.2.1.6 Finish surfaces which transmit compressive forces by contact
The connections which transmit compressive forces by contact should have their surfaces
Contact prepared to provide perfect nesting, using machining, saw cutting or

other suitable means.
12.2.1.7 Dimensional tolerances
The dimensional tolerances shall meet the requirements specified in P.6.4 (Annex P).
12.2.1.8 Finish bases of pillars and base plates
The bases of the columns and the base plates must be finished according to the following
requirements:
Page 115
a) base plates rolled, of a thickness not exceeding 50 mm, can be used without
machining, provided it is obtained satisfactory support for contact; laminated base plates
with a thickness exceeding 50 mm but less than 100 mm can be desempenadas by
pressure, or planed on all contact surfaces, in order to gain support
satisfactory by contact, except as indicated in paragraphs b) and c) below; plates
Laminated above 100 mm base thickness as well as pillars and other base
types of base plates shall be planed on all contact surfaces except
as indicated in b) and c) below;
b) the lower face of the base plates, which are grouted to ensure full contact with the
concrete foundation, does not require planing;
c) the upper face of the base plates need not planing if welds are used
full penetration between these plates and the pillar.
12.2.2 Paints Factory
12.2.2.1 General requirements
The factory paint and surface preparation shall conform to the requirements of
Annex P.
Parts of steel parts that transmit efforts by adhering to the concrete can not be
painted; except in this case and in cases where the painting is unnecessary (see 10.3) in all
structure should be applied in the factory, at least one layer of "primer".
12.2.2.2 inaccessible surfaces
Except for contact surfaces, surfaces that will become inaccessible after fabrication
should be cleaned and painted in accordance with the painting specifications of the project, prior to such
fact occur.
12.2.2.3 contact surfaces
There are no limitations as to the painting of surfaces in the case of connections with screws working
by contact. Other contact surfaces, including cases of friction bolted connections and
surfaces which transmit compressive forces by contact, except in special cases
as mentioned in 6.3.4.1.1, shall be cleaned as Annex P, without being painted, the
contact is occur during manufacturing; if contact is occur only in assembling such
surfaces should be cleaned according to the specifications of the project and, if they are machined,
should receive a corrosion-inhibiting layer of a type which can be easily removed
before assembly, or of a type that need not be removed, noting, however,
115
provisions in 12.2.2.4.
12.2.2.4 surfaces adjacent to field welds
Unless otherwise specified, the surfaces to be welded in the field, in a range of
50 mm on each side of the weld must be free of materials that prevent welding
suitable or producing toxic gases during the welding operation. After welding such
surfaces should receive the same cleaning and protection provided for the entire structure.
Page 116
116
12.3 Mounting
12.3.1 Alignment of bases of pillars
The bases of pillars should be leveled and positioned at the correct elevation, being in full
contact with the support surface.
12.3.2 Care at Mount
12.3.2.1 The structure shall be mounted flush, level and plumb within the tolerances
specified in Annex Q. All parts of the structure received in the work shall be stored and
handled in a manner which is not subject to excessive stresses or suffer damage.
Temporary bracing, where required, in accordance with Annex E should be used,
to absorb all forces to which the structure may be subjected during construction, including
the resulting wind and equipment. The bracing must remain mounted, without being
damaged, as long as is necessary for the safety of the structure. Whenever there
accumulation of material, equipment or other natures forces on the structure during the
assembly, measures must be taken to ensure that requests are absorbed
corresponding.
12.3.2.2 In assembly, the structure must be bolted or welded securely, so that
can absorb any permanent action, wind and shares mounting.
12.3.3 Alignment
Welded or bolted permanent connections should only be completed after the party
the structure, which will become rigid after the execution of such connections are properly aligned,
leveled and plumbed. However, security during assembly should be guaranteed to all
time.
12.3.4 Adjustment of compressed connections pillars
Openings no greater can be accepted 1.5 mm in transmitting amendments pillars efforts
compression by contact, regardless of the amendment used (bolted or welded
with partial penetration). If the gap is greater than 1.5 mm but less than 6 mm, and if
verified that there is not enough contact area, the gap will be filled with steel shims
parallel faces. These shims may be made of carbon steel even if the steel is of the structure
other.
12.3.5 Final Painting
Responsibility for touch-up paint (including paint prior to cleaning) during and
after assembling, and the final painting of the structure as a whole, must be specified
in the contract. The final painting must meet the requirements of Annex P.
12.4 Quality Control

12.4.1 General
The manufacturer shall establish methods of quality control within the rigor that judge
necessary to ensure that all work is performed in accordance with this standard.
In addition to the procedures of quality control of the manufacturer, the material and the quality of
Page 117
117
service shall be permanently subject to inspection by qualified inspectors

representatives of the buyer. If such inspection is requested by representatives of the purchaser,
stable should be stated in the bidding documents structure.
12.4.2 Cooperation
All inspection by representatives of the purchaser as far as possible should be made
factory or place where work is being performed. The manufacturer shall cooperate with the
Inspector, allowing access to all locations where the service is running. The inspector
the buyer must establish its inspection schedule so that they are the minimum
interruptions of the manufacturer.
12.4.3 Rejection
The material or service that does not meet the requirements of this standard may be
rejected at any time during the execution of the service. The manufacturer shall receive copies of
all inspection reports provided to the purchaser for the supervision,
12.4.4 Inspection of welds
The inspection of the welds must be done in accordance with the requirements of the AWS D1.1. The inspection
look that is required should be specified in the bidding documents and project.
When nondestructive testing is required, the process, the extent, and technical standards are
acceptance should be clearly defined in the bidding documents and project.
12.4.5 Identification of Steel
The manufacturer must be able to demonstrate by written procedure and practice a method of
application and material identification, visible at least during the operations of union
Component elements of a set to be transported in full. By the method of
identification should be possible to verify the correct application of the material as:
a) designation of the specification;
b) number of the race of steel, if required;
c) Reports of tests needed to meet special requirements.
Page 118
118

Annex A (normative)
Structural steel and metal bonding materials
A.1 General
A.1.1 The recommendations in this Annex apply to structural steel and metal materials
link normally used in steel structures and composite steel-concrete.
A.1.2 The replacement of any material taken during the manufacturing or assembly
should compulsorily have the approval of the responsible for the project.
A.2 Structural Steels
A.2.1 The structural steel to be used in the structure must be new, the buyer must
specify the acceptable level of corrosion to the steel surface, A, B, C or D:
A - Surface entirely covered with scales lamination adhered to the surface,
showing little or no signs of corrosion;
B - Surfaces that present early corrosion and loss of scales lamination;
C - Areas which have lost all scale lamination or have scales
easily removable, also showing few visible pores varioliform the eye
naked;
D - Surfaces that have lost all rolling scale, presenting a number
varioliform considerable pores with the naked eye.
For more detailed specifications for appearance and surface finish, consult
SSPC-Vis1 or standard SIS 05 59 00.
A.2.2 Tests of impact and resistance to brittle fracture must be requested when
service conditions of the structure require.
A.2.3 Mechanical Properties
Are given in table A.1 the flow resistances (f
y) And rupture (f
Structural specified by Brazilian standards and Table A.2 for some structural steels
frequent use specified by ASTM.
u) For steels
Page 119
119
Table A.1 - ABNT steels for structural purposes

NBR 7007
NBR 6648
Carbon and micro-alloyed steels Thick carbon steel plates
structural and general use
for structural use
fy
fu
fy
fu
Class / grade
Class / grade
(MPa)
(MPa)
(MPa)
(MPa)
MR-250
250
400
CG-24
235
380
AR-290
290
415
CG-26
255
410
AR-345
345
450
AR-PINK
345
485
345-A or B
NBR 5000
1)
NBR 6649/6650 NBR

Thin sheets of carbon steel
structural use (cold / hot)
fy
fu
Class / grade
(MPa)
(MPa)
CF-24
240
370
CF-26
260
4002)
4103)
NBR 5004
NBR 5008
Thick plates and thick coils of steel
Thick steel plates with low Thin sheets of low-alloy steel
alloy and high strength
and high mechanical strength Low resistant to atmospheric corrosion,
for structural use - requirements
f
fu
fy
fu
Class /
Range
fy
fu
Class / grade y
Class / grade
(MPa) (MPa)
(MPa) (MPa)
degree
thickness
(MPa) (MPa)
t 19
345
480
G-30
300
415
F-32/Q-32 310
410
1,
2
and
2A
19
<t
40
315
460
G-35
345
450
F-35/Q-35 340
450
435
40 <t 100 290
NBR 5920/5921 NBR
NBR 8261
Thin sheets and coils, steel, low alloy,
Profile tubular carbon steel, cold-formed, with and without
resistant to atmospheric corrosion, for use
stitching, circular or rectangular section for structural uses
structural (cold / hot)
Circular section
Rectangular
fy
fu
Class / grade
Class / grade
fy
fu
fy
fu
(MPa)
(MPa)
(MPa)
(MPa)
(MPa)
(MPa)
Cold rolled /
310
450
B
290
400
317
400
hot rolled coils
Hot rolled
340
480
C
(Not included in
coils)
NOTES:
1)Limitations thickness: see corresponding standard
2)Cold Rolled
3)Hot rolled
317
427
345
427
Page 120
120

Table A.2 ASTM steels for structural purposes
Rating
Carbon Steels
Group1) 2)
Product Name
A36
Profiles
Plates
Bars 3)
1 and 2
t 200mm
t 100mm
A500
Profiles
A570
Plates
Profiles
Low alloy steels
and high resistance
mechanics
A572
A9924)
Low alloy steels
and high resistance
mechanics
resistant
corrosion
Atmospheric
Plates
and bars3)
Profiles
Profiles
A242
A588
Plates
and bars3)
Profiles
Plates
and bars3)
Degree
1 and 2
t 150mm
t 100mm
1 and 2
1
2
t 19 mm
19< t 38mm
38< t 100mm
1 and 2
t 100mm
The
B
40
45
50
55
42
50
42
50
55
fy
(MPa)
250
230
290
275
310
345
380
290
345
290
345
380
345
the
450
345
315
345
315
290
345
50
60
65
345
345
415
450
Low alloy steel

and self-tempered
A913
Profiles
1 and 2
tempering
NOTES:
1)Grouping of laminated profiles for the purpose of mechanical properties:
- Group 1: I and U profiles in general and angles with thickness up to 19 mm;
- Group 2: Angles larger than 19 mm thick;
- Group 3: tubular profiles.
2)The thickness t corresponds to the smaller size or the diameter of the cross section of the bar.
3)Round bars, square and flat.
4)The relationship
f f / can not be less than 1.18.
u y
A.3 steel castings and forgings
The structural elements made of cast or forged steel shall conform to one of
following specifications:
a) for cast carbon steel for general use parts: NBR 6313, 422O-AF and AF-types
4524;
b) for cast of high strength steel for structural purposes parts: NBR 7242, AF-type
5534;
c) for carbon steel forgings and alloy steel for general industrial use: ASTM A668.
fu
(MPa)
400
the
550
310
400
380
415
450
480
415
450
415
450
485
450
480
460
480
460
435
485
485
450
520
550
Page 121
121
A.4 Screws
The specifications given in Table A.3 apply to screws, with those
made of hardened steel or welded must not be heated to facilitate assembly.
Table A.3 - Materials used in screws
Specification
Resistance
flow
fyb
(MPa)
Resistance
break
fub
(MPa)
Diameter d b
(Inches or mm)
415
1 "2 d "4
b
ISO 898
Class 4.6
235
390
ASTM A325 1)
635
560
825
725
ASTM A325M 1)
635
560
825
725
12 d 36 mm
b
1 "2 d "1
b
"1< d 1 1 "2
b
16 d 24 mm
b
24 < d b 36 mm
ISO 898
Class 8.8
640
800
12 d b 36 mm
ASTM A490
895
1035
1 "2 d b 1 1 "2
ASTM A490M
895
1035
16 d 36 mm
b
ISO 898
Class 10.9
900
1000
12 d 36 mm
b
ASTM A307
NOTES:
1)Available also with atmospheric corrosion resistance comparable
the steels AR-COR-345 Degrees A and B or ASTM A588 steels.
A.5 Weld Metals
The minimum tensile strength of weld metals listed in Table 7 are 6.2.4
given in Table A.4.
Table A.4 - Minimum tensile strength of the weld metal
Weld metal
fw (MPa)
All electrodes with class

Resistance 6 or 60
415

Resistance 7 or 70
485

resistance 8 or 80
550
Page 122
122
A.6 Shear Connectors with pin-type head

A.6.1 The shear connectors with pin-type head, used in composite construction steel
Specifically, must have dimensions in accordance with AWS D1.1 and be welded to the steel profiles
Also in accordance with AWS A 1.1.
A.6.2 The structural steel usually used for connectors with pin head diameter up
22.2 mm is ASTM A108, having yield strength of 345 MPa and resistance
rupture of 415 MPa.
/ ANNEX B
Page 123
123
Annex B (normative)
Share
B.1 Scope
The recommendations in this annex are applicable to the design of structures
steel and composite structures for buildings, which are subject to the minimum requirements of the standards
NBR 6120, NBR 6123, NBR NBR 7188 and 8681.
B.2 Permanent Shares
According to NBR 8681, the permanent actions are divided into direct and indirect. Actions
Direct permanent consist of:
a) self-weight of structural members;
b) weights of all construction elements permanently supported by the frame,
such as floors, fixed walls, roofs, ceilings, stairs, coatings, finishes
etc..;
c) weights facilities, permanent fixtures and fittings such as pipes
water, sewer, stormwater, gas pipelines and electric cables;
d) any other actions of virtually permanent basis throughout the life of
structure, due to own weight.
Indirect permanent actions are due to support settlement, shrinkage of
materials and prestressing.
B.2.2 building materials Weight
For purposes of design, when determining the direct permanent actions should be taken the
the actual construction weight materials to be used, and, in the absence of information
more precise, the values
used shall be those indicated in NBR 6120.
B.3 Shares variables
B.3.1 Definition
Shares variables are those that result from the use and occupancy of the building or structure, such
as distributed on floors overloads due to the weight of people, objects and materials
stocked, stocks of equipment such as elevators, central air conditioning, machinery
industrial cranes and hoists, weight removable walls, overloads on roofs, bridges etc..
Are also variable shares the thrusts of land, hydrostatic pressures, the pressure of the wind,
temperature variations, etc..
B.3.2 Characteristic values
The characteristic values
of the shares must be obtained from the standards listed in B.1 and
customer specifications, supplemented by the following information and other information,
such as test results, weather reports, manufacturers' specifications
equipment, etc..
Page 124
124
B.3.3 Actions concentrated

In floors, roofs, and other similar situations, should be considered, in addition to variable shares
mentioned in B.3.1, a concentrated force applied in the most unfavorable position, intensity
compatible use as the building (eg action of a monkey to vehicle weight of a
or two people on Tuesdays coverage or stairs, etc..).
B.3.4 Partial Load
It must be regarded as the maximum value of the variable action, applied to a portion of structure or
bar, the effect produced is most unfavorable than that resulting from application of all the
structure or structural component of an action of the same value.
B.3.5 Impact
B.3.5.1 Variables actions, in some cases, already include the normal effects of impact.
However, should be considered in the design, beyond the static values
of the shares, also
dynamic effects and / or impacts caused by lifts, equipment, cranes etc.,
if it is unfavorable.
B.3.5.1.1 Lifts
All actions of elevators should be increased by 100%, unless specified
otherwise, to account for the impact, his supporters should be designed within the
deformation limits allowed by specific regulations.
B.3.5.1.2 Equipment
To account for the impact, the weight of equipment and moving loads shall be increased; for
the following cases, the increases indicated may be used if there is no specification
contrario:
a) light equipment whose operation is characterized primarily by
rotating movements; talhas...........................................................................................20%;
b) equipment whose operation is fundamentally characterized by movements
alternate; groups
B.3.5.1.3 Overhead Cranes
B.3.5.1.3.1 structures that support cranes must be designed, obeying
the provisions of B.5, for the purpose of calculation of the shares, increased for take into account the impact
vertical if it is unfavorable, and considering horizontal forces, as follows, if
there is not otherwise specified:
a) the increase of the vertical loads of the wheels will be 25% for cranes
commanded a cabin and 10% for cranes controlled by control
pendant or remote control;
b) transverse to the runway force being applied at the top rail of each
side (see B.3.5.1.3.2) is to be taken as:
Page 125
125
b.1) in buildings not intended for steel, the greater of:

- 10% of the sum of the load lifted by the weight of the trolley and devices
lifting;
- 5% of the sum of the load hoisted to the total weight of bridge and trolley including
lifting devices;
- 15% of the hoisted load.
b.2) in buildings for steel, 20% of the hoisted load, except in the following
situations:
- 50% of the load hoisted bridge with hopper and electromagnet and bridge
patio slabs and billets;
- 100% of the load hoisted oven-well bridge;
- 100% of the weight of the mold and the ingot to Ripper bridge.
c) a longitudinal force to the runway, to be applied on top of the rail,
each integrally hand, when not determined more accurately, must be equal
20% of the sum of the maximum loads of the motor and / or wheels equipped with brakes;
d) the force due to the shock of the crane with the stop should be informed by
manufacturer, which should also specify and if possible, stop.
B.3.5.1.3.2 With respect to point b) of B.3.5.1.3.1, where the horizontal stiffness
the cross-sectional structure of one side of the roll path differs from the opposite side, the
distribution of the transverse forces to be proportional to the stiffness of each side, using the
double the previous percentages as the total lateral force shall be distributed.
B.3.5.1.4 hangers
If there is no specified otherwise, variables shares (including overhead) on floors and
branches supported by hangers should be increased by 33% to account for the impact.
B.3.6 Overload gravels
B.3.6.1 common Hedges
Public coverage, not subject to any material accumulations, and in the absence of
otherwise specified, shall be provided an overload characteristic minimum of 0.25
kN / m2In horizontal projection.
B.3.6.2 Special Cases
In special cases the overhead in coverage shall be determined in accordance with the purpose
thereof.
Page 126
126
B.4 Wind
B.4.1 General
B.4.1.1 The wind action should be determined according to NBR 6123 for the system
Main resistant to the action of the wind, for individual elements of the structure and the
closures.
B.4.1.2 To determine the loading and response of structures irregular geometry,
flexible, or unusual location, tests shall be made in wind tunnels.
B.4.2 In the structures whose height does not exceed 5 times the horizontal dimension less or 50 m
can assume that the wind is a static action. In other cases and in cases of doubt, must
be taken into account the dynamic effects of the wind.
B.5 Combinations crane beams to calculate bearing and
media structures
B.5.1 Building a ship
B.5.1.1 If only operates an overhead crane, should be considered with the vertical load and impact
the maximum transverse and longitudinal forces, in the most unfavorable position.
B.5.1.2 In the case of two or more bridges that run on the same runway and
eventually will work together or nearby, you should:
a) Consider the action of only one bridge as B.5.1.1;
b) if the bridges will work together to hoisted a higher load capacity than the
one of them, or because the conditions so require, consider the vertical load without
impact and 50% of the maximum transverse and longitudinal forces, in the position that causes the
greater efforts (this assumption is justified by the work of two or more
bridges be done very slowly);
c) if the bridges with equal or different capacities can act very close,
consider busiest bridge with vertical load without impact and transverse forces and
maximum longitudinal, and other bridges with vertical load without impact forces without
horizontal, on the whole the most unfavorable position (this assumption is justified by
probability of occurrence is very remote, except in some cases where the conditions
Operation warrant a more rigorous treatment, such as patio plates
steel mills, in which to consider the busiest bridge with impact
vertical).
To check to fatigue, consider only an overhead crane with vertical impact and 50% of
horizontal transverse strength of the bridges.
B.5.2 buildings of two or more ships
B.5.2.1 In the case of buildings of two or more ships, make a joint analysis of only two
ships, if the worst-looking requests, complying with the provisions in B.5.2.2 and B.5.2.3. In
any situation, one should not fail to see the effects of a bridge on each ship,
as B.5.1.1.
Page 127
B.5.2.2 Having an overhead crane on a ship and another on the ship adjacent to consider load
vertical with maximum impact and shear forces of the bridge causing the biggest requests
and the other bridge loaded without vertical impact and without transverse force. The longitudinal force
should be calculated for both.
127
B.5.2.3 Having one or two bridges on a ship and one two adjacent bridges in nature,
consider: the maximum vertical load impact and transverse horizontal forces and
longitudinal bridge causing the biggest requests and other bridges loaded without
vertical and lateral force without impact. The longitudinal force shall be calculated for bridges
causing the major requests, one for each vessel.
/ ANNEX C
Page 128
128

Annex C (normative)
Recommended maximum displacements
C.1 General
C.1.1 This annex lists the maximum displacements recommended for situations
usual frequent in buildings. These movements should be understood as values
practical
be used for verification of limit state displacements
Excessivetostructure.
C.1.2 Some values
recommended maximum displacements, other than those specified in this
Annex, is provided elsewhere in this Standard and should be considered.
C.2 Requirements
C.2.1 The structures should be sized so that the maximum recommended values
for vertical and horizontal displacements data C.3 are not exceeded except
when specific limits are established for each use between the client and the
responsible for the structural design. In some cases, tighter limits may have to be
adopted, considering the use of edifying, the characteristics of finishing materials or
to ensure proper functioning of equipment, etc.. On the other hand,
certain situations, it can be assumed less stringent limits, as in constructions
interim.
C.2.2 Data in C.3 recommended maximum values
are empirical. They serve to
comparison with the results of structural analysis, taken as C.2.3.
C.2.3 The offsets should be calculated using the rare combinations of use
given in 4.7.3, taking into account the second order effects and the possible occurrence of
plastic deformations in the limit state. The effect of the rotation stiffness of the connections,
depending on assessment of responsibility for the project may have to be also considered.
C.2.4 For composite beams, the procedure for calculating the vertical displacements and the values
maximum recommended for these shifts are given in Q.1.2.1.
C.3 Maximum values
recommended
C.3.1 The maximum recommended values
for the vertical displacements (arrows) and horizontal
are given in Table C.1. In the case of vertical displacements, such values
are referenced
a beam simply supported.
C.3.2 When using the table C.1 in the calculation of maximum vertical displacement (
max) To be
compared to
The contraflecha the beam can be deducted up to the limit of the value of the arrow
1
from the permanent actions.
Page 129
129
Table C.1 - recommended maximum displacements

Description
4) 5)
- Sleepers closing general
6)
- Sleepers closing general
- Sleepers supporting closures subject to cracking and / or
components sensitive to excessive displacements
4) 5)
- Tuesdays in general
- Tuesdays supporting closures subject to cracking and / or
1)
1
1)
2
L/180
-
L/120
Examples of
Combinations 2) 3)
FG+ FQ2
FQ1
L/180
FQ1
L/180
FG+ FQ20.2 + FQ1

F 0.3 + F
components sensitive to excessive displacements

- Trusses and roof trusses in general
5)
5)
L/250
L/250
L/180
L/300
L/350
L/350
L/400
L/400
L/500
- Floor beams generally
- Beams supporting floor finishes subject to cracking

(Masonry, hardboard, etc..) And frames
- Floor Beams supporting pillars
FQ2
Q10.2 + FQ1
Q2
FG+ FQ2
+0.4 FQ3
+0.2 FQ1
FG+ FQ3
+0.3 FQ2
+0.2 FQ1
FQ1
FG+ FQ2
+0.4 FQ3
FG+ FQ3
+ 1FQ27)
FQ2
+0.4 FQ3
FQ3
+ 1FQ27)
FG+ FQ2
+0.4 FQ3
FG+ FQ3
+ 1FQ27)
FQ2
+0.4 FQ3
FQ3
+ 1FQ27)
FG+ FQ2
+0.4 FQ3
FG+ FQ3
+ 1FQ27)
FQ2
+0.4 FQ3
FQ3
+ 1FQ27)
Beams bearing:
- Vertical offset for overhead cranes
L/600
FQ38)
lower characteristic 200KN
L/800
FQ38)
- Vertical offset for overhead cranes
equal or superior characteristic to 200KN
FQ3
- Horizontal displacement due to the bridge transverse actions
L/600
Sheds and buildings in general a floor:
FQ10.3 + FQ20.4 + FQ3
6)
- Horizontal offset from the top to the base
H/300 FQ30.2 + FQ10.3 + FQ2
Buildings of two or more floors:
6)
- Horizontal offset from the top to the base
H/400
FQ1+ 1FQ27)
- Horizontal scrolling on between two consecutive floors
H/300
FQ1+ 1FQ27)
NOTES:
1)L is the gap between theoretical support (for beams with restriction of rotation in flexion in the support plane, L is the distance between
Sections of zero moment) or twice the theoretical length of the swing, H is the total height of the pillar (distance
is the floors),
top to bottom), h is the height of the floor (distance between centers of the beams of two consecutive
offset
1
referring to the combination of all actions (see C.3.2)2and
displacement is related to the combination of variables shares.
2)F are the permanent actions; F is the action of the wind;isFthe overhead roof or floor and F
G
Q1
Q2
Q3are actions
from lifting and transport equipment.
3)Favorable variable actions should not be considered in combination.
4)Displacements between lines of rods in the same plane.
5)On roofs with little slope, displacement limit should also be adopted in order to avoid
occurrence of puddling.
6) In the case of masonry walls, limiting the horizontal displacement (perpendicular to the wall) so that the
opening of the crack that might occur in the base of the wall does not exceed 2.0 mm, as understood wall panel
disk (Figure C.1).
7) is the utilization factor regarding the value of frequent overloading, according to table 2.
1
8)Value not increased by the coefficient of impact.
Page 130
130
displacement
to be limited
Wall as
rigid panel
base
wall
<2mm
Figure C.1 - as rigid wall panel
/ ANNEX D
Page 131
131
Annex D (normative)
Characteristic bending moment resistant non-slender beams
D.1 General
D.1.1 This appendix provides procedures for determining the bending moment resistant
characteristic of non-slender beams subjected to bending normal single.
D.1.2 not slender beams are those consisting of sections I, H, U, casket and tubular
Rectangular whose souls when bending axis perpendicular to have a slenderness parameter
less than or equal to r ( and r defined in table D.1 for the limit state FLA), by sections
tubes with circular relationship between diameter and wall thickness not exceeding
by circular or rectangular solid sections with any dimensions.
045 E f and
y
D.1.3 To facilitate the use of this Annex, the symbology used is detailed at the end.
D.2 resistant characteristic bending moment
D.2.1 For the types of section and bending axes indicated in Table D.1, for the limit state FLT,
the characteristic resistant bending moment is given by:
a) M
b) M
Rk
Rk
=M
To
lp
=C
pl
- (M
-
p M , for <
- M )
pl
r -
pl
p
r
r
p
>
c) M = M To
Rk
cr
D.2.2 For the types of section and bending axes indicated in Table D.1, for the limit states
FLM and FLA, the characteristic resistant bending moment is given by:
a) M
b) M
c) M
Rk
Rk
Rk
=M
=M
To
lp
- (M
pl
= M To
cr
-
p M , for
- M )
pl
r -
pl
r
p
<
> (Not applicable to FLA)

r
D.2.3 For solid circular and rectangular sections flexed relative to the minor axis
inertia:
M
Rk
=M
lp
D.2.4 For the circular tubular sections, to limit state FLP, the only one to be considered,
with D / t not exceeding
045 E f , We have:
y
a) M
Rk
=M
To
lp
Page 132
132
b) M
c) M
Rk
Rk
0021 E
D t
033 E
D t
D
t
=
0071 E
f
W , for
W , for >
with
=
+f
<
=
r
031 E
f
Page 133
133
Table D.1 - Parameters for the characteristic resistance to bending moment

United
Mr
Mcr
limit
applicable
FLT
L
I sections with f y( - f r ) W C
b
1 1+ 2
two shafts
See note 6) b
r
2
symmetry and the following
y
U sections
f (- f ) W
y r c
Sections I and H with two
or
or axes of symmetry
FLT
f
W
L
with a shaft
I sections with
See note 2)
y t
b
(Whichever is follow
r
symmetry in the planean axis of
yc
lower)
medium of the soul, and
symmetry
See note 6)
U sections not subject to
the following
twist, flexed in
about the axis of greatest
f (- f ) W
moment of inertia
y r c See footnote 7) the b
FLM
See note 6)
follow
t
Type section and shaft

flexion
176
E
f
y
See note 1)
follow
176
E
fy
See note 2)
follow
038
E
f
See footnote 7) the

follow
FLA
See note 4)
follow
the following
f W
y
FLM
f W
See note 5)
y
Sections I and H with two follow
axis of symmetry and
U sections flexed in
about the axis of lower
FLA
moment of inertia
See footnote 8) tof yWf
follow
Solid sections
rectangular flexed in
about the axis of greatest
moment of inertia
Sections coffin and

rectangular tubular
doubly symmetric
flexed around a
axis of symmetry
f W
y
FLT
See footnote 7) the b

follow
tw
W2
f f
W y
See note 3)
follow
200CbE
ITThe
f y( - f r ) W
FLT
200CbE
See Note 9) theSee note 6)
ITThe
follow
the following
f yWf
FLM
W2
f f
W y
See note 3)
the followingSee note 3)
follow
f W
y
FLA
Page 134
134
Notes relating to the table D.1 are as follows:

1) =
r
0707
4
1 1+ 1+ 2 M2
2 r
M
r
1
Where:
= GE I The
1
T
EC
=
w
2 GI
r
T y
with
I d -( t )2
f , for sections I
C = y
w
4
w
h
tw
h
tw
y
h E
376
hp fy
038
E
f
y
112
E
f
y
570
E
f
y
See footnote 7) the

follow
140
E
f
y
b
r
y
013E
I The
T
M
pl
200E
I The
T
M
r
L
b
r
y
013E
I The
T
M
pl
200E
I The
T
M
r
b
tw
112
E
f
y
140
E
f
y
h
tw
376
E
f
y
570
E
f
y
t b ( - 0 t5 )3 d -( t ) 2 3 b ( - 0 t5 t) + 2 d -( t t)
w
f
f
w f
f w , for sections U
C = f f
w
12
6 b ( - 0 t5 t) + d -( t t)
f
w f
f w
2) M
cr
2 EC
L
b I I B (+ 1 + B + B 2 ) M
y T 1
2
1
lp
2E
=
I I ( B + 1+ B + B2 )
r M r
y T
1
2
1
r yc
Where:
[ (
) ]
B = 225 2 I I - 1 (h L ) I I
1
yc y
b
y T
(
)(
)
B = 25 1 - I I I I (h L )2
2
yc y yc T
b
C = 100 if I I < 010 or I I > 090
b
yc y
yc y
3) W f is the section modulus (elastic least on the bending axis, to a section
has a compressed table (or in the case of compressed soul bent U profile about the axis
lower inertia) in width ab
f Given by:
- For rectangular tubular section of uniform thickness
when
b t / 140 E f /
y
Page 135
b
= 191 t
when
b <t /
b
E
038
E
1f
( / B) T f
y
y
140 E f /
y
=b
- For the other sections

when
b t /
when
b
= 191 t
b <t /
f
=b
149 E f /
y
E
034 E
1f
( / B) T f
y
y
149 E f /
y
135
In soul compressed bent U section relative to the axis of smallest inertia,

b = h t, = t andb = h .
w
f
f
4) The formulation presented applies only to sections where the ratio h / h
0.75 and 1.50.
c is between
5) In this case the state limit FLM applies only to the U section soul, when compressed by
bending moment.
6) The residual stress f r is equal to 70 MPa in rolled sections and welded manufactured by
deposition of weld metal with a torch cut plates and 115 MPa in the other profiles
soldiers.
7) To laminate profiles
For welded
cr
cr
069 E
W , = 083
c
r
2
090 E k
c W , = 095
c
r
2
E
f( - f )
y r
E
f( f ) k /
y r
c
Where:
k =
c
4
h t
and 035 k 0763

c
8) The limit state FLA applies only to the soul of the U section, when compressed by time
bending.
Page 136
136
9) The limit state FLT is only applicable when the bending axis is the highest point in
inertia.
For this Annex adopted the following symbols:
FLA - local buckling of the soul
FLM - local buckling of the compressed table
FLT - with lateral torsional buckling
FLP - local buckling of the tube wall
A - cross-sectional area
Cb - Modification factor for non-uniform bending moment diagram (see 5.4.2.5 and
5.4.2.6)
C - The constant warping of the cross section
w
D - Outside diameter of circular section tubular
E - modulus of elasticity of the steel
G - modulus of transverse elasticity of the steel
I T - Moment of inertia of uniform twist

I y - Moment of inertia of the section about the axis passing through the plane of the soul
I yc - Moment of inertia of the compressed table to the axis passing through the plane
Average soul (if unlocked in length there positive or negative moments
make the table smaller moment of inertia about the axis mentioned)
Lb - Distance between two sections contained the lateral torsional buckling with (length
unlocked)
M - Bending moment of elastic buckling
cr
M p - Bending moment plasticizing section
l
M r - Bending moment corresponding to the onset of yield (including residual stresses
in some cases)
W - elastic modulus of resistance (minimum) of the section on the axis of flexion
W c - Elastic modulus of resistance of the tablet next to the section on the axis of
flexion
W - Elastic resistance of the module side pulled the section on the axis of flexion
t
b - width
Page 137
137
b / t - ratio of width and thickness applicable to the listing table; in the case of sections I and H
with an axis of symmetry, b / t refers to the compressed table (for sections of tables I and H, B is
half of the total width U sections tables for the full width for tubular sections
rectangular, the length of the flat part and coffin profiles, the free distance between
souls)
bf - Overall width of the table
d - external height of the section perpendicular to the axis of bending measure
f r - Residual compressive stress on the tables
f y - Yield strength of steel
h - height of the soul, taken equal to the distance between the inner faces of the tables in the profiles
soldiers and equal to this value minus the two rays of agreement between the table and the soul
laminates and equal to the length of the flat part profiles in rectangular tubular sections
hc - Twice the distance of the center of gravity of the cross section to the inner face of
compressed table in welded and this value less the fillet radius between table
and soul with rolled profiles (doubly symmetric profiles
h =)h
c
hp - Twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis (due to bending moment) of section
transverse to the inner face of the welded compressed table and this value less
fillet radius between desk and soul with rolled profiles (in doubly profiles
symmetrical, h p = h ), Lower value may not be taken ah

r - Radius of gyration of the section relative to the principal axis of inertia perpendicular to the axis
y
bending
r yc - Radius of gyration of the T-section formed by the compressed table and that part of the soul
attached compressed in the elastic range with respect to the axis passing through the plane of the
soul (if there are positive and negative moments in the length unlocked, take the section
T a smaller radius of gyration with respect to said axis)
t - thickness
t f - Thickness of table
t w- Web thickness
- parameter slenderness
- Slenderness parameter corresponding to the lamination
p
- Slenderness parameter corresponding to the onset of yield
r
/ ANNEX E
Page 138
138

Annex E (normative)
Local buckling in compressed bars
E.1 General
E.1.1 The elements that are part of the usual cross sections, except the tubular sections
circular for the purpose of local buckling, are classified as AA (two longitudinal edges
linked) and AL (only a linked longitudinal edge) as 5.1.2.2.1.
E.1.2 bars subjected to the normal compressive force in which all the elements
components of the cross section width and thickness have relationships (relationships
b t )/ Not
outweigh the values
of
r data in Table E.1, have the Q factor equal to 1.00. The sections
cross these bars are classified as compact as 5.1.2.1.1.
E.1.3 bars subjected to the normal compressive force to which the component elements
cross section have relationships b / t values
greater than
r E.1 data in the table have
Q coefficient given by:
Q=Q Q
s the
where Qs and the
Qare coefficients that take into account local buckling of AL and AA elements,
whose values
are to be determined as shown in E.2 and E.3, respectively. The sections
cross these bars are classified as slender as 5.1.2.1.1.
E.1.4 tubular sections are circular having a Q coefficient determined in accordance with E.4.
E.2 Elements tablets AL
The value of Q
sto be used are as follows:
- Element of group 3 of table E.1:

f
b
Q = 1340 - 076
s
t
Q =
s
f
y , for
E
053 E
, for
b 2
E
b
E
< 091
f
t
f
y
y
0.45
b
E
> 091
t
f
y
y t
- Elements of group 4 of Table E.1 belonging to laminated profiles:

f
b
Q = 1415 - 074
s
t
y , for
E
0.56
E
b
E
< 103
f
t
f
y
y
Page 139
Q =
s
069 E
b 2
f
y t
139
b>
E
103
t
f
y
, for
- Elements of group 4 of Table E.1, welded belonging to:

b
Q = 1415 - 065
s
t
Q =
s
y , for
k E
c
090 E k
c , for
b 2
f
y t
b
> 117
t
0.64
E
(F k / )
y c
<
b
117
t
E
f( k /)
y c
With the coefficient k c given by:

For profiles I:
k=
c
4
h t
Being
w
035 k 0763
c
For other sections:

k c = 0.763
- Elements of group 5 of table E.1:
b
E
f ( k /)
y c
Q s = 1908 - 122 t
Q =
s
f
Ey , for
069 E
, for
b 2
0.75 f
< t 103 f
b>
E
103
t
f
y
y t
Where:
h is the height of the soul;
bet are the width and thickness of the element, respectively (see Table E.1).
Page 140
140

Table E.1 - Values
of
Values
of
tos
en po
in
l Gru
E
Description
elements
Some examples indicating

bet
- Tables or sections of souls

rectangular tubular
1
- Coverslips and plates

diaphragms between lines
screws or welding
140
E
f
y
149
E
f
y
t (uniform)
b1
AA
b2
- Souls of sections U, I, H,
coffin
t1
t2
2
- Plates
Continuing
reinforcement tables
of
t
t b
tAverage table
tAverage table
b
- Tabs
ledge
simple
- Tabs
ledge
double fitted sheet
b
t
045
E
f
of travejamento
b
b
- Tables of sections U, I, H
and T
AL
4
- Tabs
ledge
continuously connected
b
b
056
- Stiffeners soul
In profiles
laminates
b
t
t
t b
5 - Souls of sections T
E
f
y
In profiles
soldiers 1)
E
064
f ( k /)
y c
075
E
f
1) The coefficient kc is given in E.2.
Page 141
141
E.3 Elements tablets AA

E.3.1 When the width / thickness ratio of a compression member AA exceeds the values
indicated in Table E.1, one effective width b should be determined
f for this element as
follows:
a) souls at tables or rectangular hollow sections:
b
= 191 t
E
038 E
1
b t/
b) in other AA members (excluding succession of plates with openings for access):

b
= 191 t
E
034 E
1
b t/
Where:
is the stress calculation in AA element in megapascals, obtained by approximations
successive dividing the normal force calculation of the effective area A
f (See E.3.2);
b is the actual width of a tablet AA element as E.1 table in the same
T unit;
t is the thickness of AA element;
b is the effective width in the same unit of t.
f
E.3.2 Certain the effective widths of all elements of the AA section, the Q value
defined as the ratio between the effective area Af The gross floor area
and
entire section of the bar:
g the
Q the
=
The
f
it is
the
The
g
Where:
= The - (b - b ) t
The
f
g
f
with the summation extending to all AA elements.
E.4 Walls of circular tubular sections
E.4.1 In the circular tube sections, the local buckling coefficient of the wall is given by:
- Is
D
E
011
t
f
y
Page 142
142

Q = 100
- Is
011
Q=
E
D
E
< 045
f
t
f
y
y
0038 E 2
+
D t f
3
y
Where:
D is the external diameter of the tubular circular section;
t is the wall thickness.
E.4.2 Not circular tubular sections to be used with
same as above resistance decreases rapidly.
D t / exceeding the limit
045
E
f
/ ANNEX F
Page 143
143
Annex F (normative)
Moment resistant characteristic bending of slender beams
F.1 General
F.1.1 This Annex applies to the design of slender beams, defined in F.1.2, with section
Welded I or H with two axes of symmetry or an axis of symmetry in the plane of the soul,
loaded in this plan, meeting the following requirements:
- If monossimtricas sections, the largest normal stress in the soul, due to the time
bending, traction should be;
= h t / Where h is the distance between the inner faces of
- The slenderness parameter
w
tables et w is the thickness of the soul, can not exceed 260 or value:
=
Max
048 E
f
f( + f )
y y r
E ( fe in megapascal )
y
unless the spacing between transverse stiffeners, a, are such that

()theh 1 5,In which case
11 7 E f
Maxmay be taken equal to
before, where E is the modulus of elasticity f
overcome this limit

y
y the yield strength of the steel.
In this equation, E is the modulus of elasticity f

y the yield strength of the steel, f
residual stress equal to 70 MPa in welded manufactured by depositing weld metal
plates cut with a torch and 115 MPa in other welded.
F.1.2. 's slender beams are those with height / thickness of the web (
r is
h t / ) Greater than
w
570 E f .
y
F.2 resistant characteristic bending moment
F.2.1 The sturdy characteristic bending moment, M
states limits the flow table and pulled buckling:
a) for transporting the pulled table:
M
=W f
Rk, The smallest value is obtained according to the
Rk
b) for buckling:
M
Rk
xt y
=W k
xc pg cr
Where:
W xc is the elastic modulus of resistance in relation to the bending axis of the tablet side
the cross section;
Page 144
144

W xt is the elastic modulus of resistance in relation to the bending axis, the tensioned side of the
cross section;
is the tension buckling as F.2.2;
cr
k
pg
= 1-
The The
h
E
w f
- 570
1 0,
+
1200 300 The The t

w f w
cr
where A area of
the soul and theis the area of
the compressed table.
w
f
F.2.2 The buckling stress
buckling:

a) for
cr
b) for
cr
=f
<
=f
>
c) to
cr
cr is calculated as follows for each limit state
1 - 0 5,
p
-
r
p
pg
2
F.2.3 Values
of ,
p and rand the coefficient Cpg are determined for each limit state
buckling, as follows (in sizing should be used the lower value of
- Limit state: lateral torsional buckling with (FLT)
=
b
r
T
= 176
cr)
fy
= 444
r
pg
C E
b
f
y
= 2C E
b
Where:
Page 145
145
Lb is the distance between two sections contained laterally;

Cb is the modification factor for non-uniform bending moment diagram, defined
in 5.4.2.5 and 5.4.2.6, as applicable;
r T is the radius of gyration on the minor axis moment of inertia of the section
formed by the compressed table plus 1/3 of the compressed soul.
- Limit State: Local buckling of the compressed table (FLM)
b
f
t2
f
= 038
E
f
E
= 135
r
f
y
C
pg
= 088 E k
Where:
k =
c
4
h t
and 035 k 0763

c
bf et f are the total width and thickness, respectively, of compressed table

F.2.4 The limit state of local buckling of the soul is not applicable.
/ ANNEX G
Page 146
146
Annex G (normative)
Shear resistant characteristics including the effect of field drift
G.1 shear force resistant feature
G.1.1 The shear resistant feature souls of sections I and H, prismatic, flexed in
relative to the perpendicular to the central axis (s) core (s) inertia, including the field effect
traction, VRktis determined as follows (see G.1.3)
a) for
V
Rkt
=V
>
b) for
V
Rkt
p
lp
= [C + (1 - C )] V
v
v
lp
Where:
Vp is the shear force corresponding to yielding of the soul shear, defined in
l
5.4.3.2.2;
Cv is the coefficient of shear force, given in G.1.2;
1
115 1 +
the 2
h
G.1.2 The shear coefficient C

a) for
h t/
p
w
r
C=
v
b) for
h t/ >
w
r
C=
v
Where:
110 k E f
v
y
h t
w
151 k E
v
(h t ) 2 f
w
y
is determined as follows (see G.1.3)

Page 147
147
kv is the buckling coefficient of the Soul by shear force, given by:

5
k = 5 + ()
v
theh 2
should be taken equal to 5.0 s
the h / exceed 3.0 or
[ 260 / h ( t / )] 2.
w
G.1.3 The parameters , pAnd r, And aeh dimensions are defined in 5.4.3.2.1.
G.2 Requirements and limitations for use of the field tensile
G.2.1 The relationshiph
the / can not exceed 3.0 nor the
relationship
h t/ .
w
[ 260 / h ( t / )] 2Regardless of
w
G.2.2 The transverse stiffeners, as well as meet the requirements given in 5.4.3.2.3, points
a), b), c) and e), must also have a minimum cross-sectional area (in a plane parallel to
tables listing), given by:
The =
st
r
015 D
(
) VSd th 1 - C
18 t 2
w
v V
w
Rd
Where:
VSd is the shear force requester calculating the cross section of the beam is located where the
stiffener;
VRd is resistant to shear force calculation, not including the effect of field strength,
according to 5.4.3.1;
is the relationship between the flow resistances of steels of soul and stiffener;
r
Ds is a coefficient equal to 1.0 for stiffeners placed in pairs, 1.8 for
stiffeners consisting of a bracket and to the stiffeners consist of 2.4
one plate;
For the meanings of other terms see 5.4.3.2.1 and G.1.
G.2.3 The effect of the drift field does not apply to end panels of the soul, the panels
openings nor the latter adjacent panels.
G.2.4 The effect of the drift field does not apply to different requests of the normal bending
simple, and should be verified interaction between the shear force and bending moment,
as 5.4.3.2.4.
G.2.5 The effect of the drift field also does not apply to beams with souls subject to forces
concentrated without stiffeners into sections, for example, in the case of beams subjected to forces
furniture.
/ ANNEX H
Page 148
148

Annex H (normative)
Length buckling by bending and twisting of compressed bars
H.1 buckling bending

H.1.1 The slenderness ratio of compressed element is defined as the ratio between
buckling length and the radius of gyration as applicable. The length of buckling
KL equal to the actual length L of the bar not braced multiplied by a factor K,
called buckling coefficient can be interpreted as being equal to the length
a compressed bar with labeled edges, the cross-section and whose resistance
buckling are equal to the actual bar. The buckling coefficient K of a bar
compressed depends on your boundary conditions and, theoretically, can vary from 0.5 to
infinity.
H.1.2 In Table H.1 theoretical values
of K are given for six ideal cases, in which the
rotation and translation of the ends are totally free or totally prevented. If not
we can ensure the completeness of the collet, the recommended values
should be used
submitted.
H.1.3 k values
for the bars belonging to the trusses can be obtained H.2 table, or
can be determined from an analysis of elastic buckling of the truss considered.
H.1.4 values
for K pillars of continuous structures are presented in Annex J.
Table H.1 - Buckling Coefficient K for insulated bars
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
Theoretical values
of K
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
Recommended Values
0.65
0.80
1.2
1.0
2.1
2.0
Dashed line indicates the

line elastic buckling
Hindered rotation and translation

Code to condition
support
Free rotation, translation prevented

Hindered rotation, free translation
Rotation and translation free
Page 149
149
Table H.2 - Buckling Coefficient K for truss bars

Case
the
i
el
r
Element considered
Rope
1.0
Extreme diagonal
1.0
Amount or diagonal
1.0
Diagonal compressed linked

the center to a diagonal
pulled the same section
0.5
The T
an
lp
on
m
ge
amba
l
F
the
i
el
r
Rope with all nodes

contained outside the plane of
truss
Continuous strings where

A and B are only contained
out of plane
F1(> F2)
1.0
F
,75
0 + 025 2
F
1
The T
lan
p
ra
fo
m
ge
amba
lF
8
Amount or diagonal
1.0
Strut
continuous, connected to the center1 0,- 075
pulled one diagonal
same section
Continuous amount of lattice

K
F (> F )
1 2
t 0 5,
F
c
F
,75
0 + 025 2
F
1
Page 150
150
H.2 torsional buckling

The torsional buckling length is equal to the actual length of the bar, L, multiplied
for buckling coefficient, K, depending on the boundary conditions, related to the rotation and
warping, whose theoretical values
are equal to:
a) 1.00, where the two bar ends having hindered rotation, and
free warping;
b) 0.50, where both ends of the rotation and warping bar having
prevented;
c) 0.70 where one of the ends of the bar have hindered rotation and warping
free and the other rotation and warping prevented;
d) 2.00 where one end of the bar has free rotation and warping and
another rotation and warping prevented.
/ ANNEX J
Page 151
Annex J (normative)
Length of bending buckling of pillars of continuous structures
J.1 The length of flexural buckling of pillars of continuous structures, braced and
is not braced, given by the product KL, where K is a coefficient and L is the buckling
length of the pillar measured wheelbase beams.
J.2 K values
can be obtained from the figures abacus and J.1 J.2, respectively, for
braced and not braced structures, in which the indices A and B refer to the nodes
the two ends of the length L of the pillar analyzed, where G is defined as:
Ip
L
p
G=
I
v
L
v
where indicates the sum of the relations length and moment of inertia (I / L) of all
bar rigidly connected to the node, located in the plan that is being considered buckling
the pillar, I p is the moment of inertia and L p the length of an abutment between A and B, I v is the time
of inertia and L the span of a beam rigidly connected to the node. I and R
are calculated in relation to
v
p v
perpendicular to the buckling being considered plane axes.
Having determined G
and B
Gfor a segment of the pillar, the value of K can be found
The
drawing a straight line between the appropriate points of the scales L
Theand G
B. The length of
flexural buckling is sought KL, where L is defined in J.1.
To end supported in the pillar base, but not rigidly connected to such bases, G is
theoretically equal to , but, unless you run a real kneecap, can be taken equal to 10
in practical cases. If the end of the pillar are rigidly connected to a base
sized appropriately, G can be taken equal to 1.0. Values
may be used
below 1.0 if justified by analysis.
The equations which are based on an abacus are listed below:
- Braced structures
G G
2
G +G
TheB
+
The B 1 4
K
2
- Not braced structures

2
- 36
G G
The B K
= K
(6
G +G )
The B
tg
K
K +2
tg
K
tg
2K = 1
151
Page 152
152
J.3 Alternatively to the use of the abacus and J.1 J.2 figure, the K values
can be obtained
the following approximate expressions:
- Braced structures
K=
064 + 1 (4G + G ) + 3 G G
The B
The B
128 + (2G + G ) + 3 G G
The B
The B
- Not braced structures

K=
7 5,+ (4
G
+ G ) +1 6 G G
The B
The B
7 5,+ G + G
The B
J.4 The procedure described in this annex is based on the following assumptions:
a) all the pillars are continuous;
b) elastic behavior;
c) each bar structure has constant cross section;
d) all the links are rigid;
e) all pillars flambam simultaneously;
f) does not occur in normal force significant compression in the rafters.
Page 153
153
Figure J.1 - Values

of K for braced structures
Figure J.2 - Values

of K for structures not braced
/ ANNEX K
Page 154
154

Annex K (normative)
Normal force of elastic buckling

Sections double symmetry with K1 and symmetrical about a point
The normal force of elastic buckling, N
, A double bar with cross section
and
symmetrical or symmetrical about a point is given by:
a) to buckling bending relative to the central axis x of inertia of the cross section:
N
ex
2E I
x
(K L ) 2
x x
b) to buckling bending relative to the central axis of inertia y cross section:
ey
2E I
y
(K L )2
y y
c) for torsional buckling in relation to the longitudinal axis z:

N
ez
1 2EC
w + GI
T
r 2 (K L ) 2
the
z z
Where:
KxLx is the length of buckling by bending with respect to the x axis;
I x is the moment of inertia of the cross section with respect to the x axis;
KyLy is the length of buckling due to bending in relation to the y axis;
I y is the moment of inertia of the cross section relative to the y axis;
KzLz is the length of torsional buckling;
Cw is the constant warping of the cross section;
G is the modulus of transverse elasticity of steel;
I T is the moment of inertia of uniform twist;
r is the polar radius of gyration of the gross section relative to the shear center,
the
given by:
r =
the
r 2( + r 2 + x 2 + y 2)
x y
the the
Page 155
xtheey the
are the coordinates of the center of shear. in the direction of the principal axes
x and y, respectively, relative to the centroid of the section.
155
Sections K.2 monossimtricas

, A bar with monossimtrica cross section,
and
whose y-axis is the axis of symmetry, is given by:
a) to elastic buckling by bending relative to the central axis of inertia of the section x
Cross:
N
ex
2E I
x
(K L ) 2
x x
b) for elastic buckling for flexion-torsion:
eyz
+N
ey
ez
12 1 -[ y ( r / ) 2 ]
the the
N
4N
1-
N 1 -[ y ( r / ) 2 ]
ey ez
the the
(N + N ) 2
ey
ez
where N ey and Nez are the normal forces of elastic buckling as K.1-b) and K1-c)
respectively.
If the x axis is the axis of symmetry, just replace x by y in a) and y by x and y
by x the
b).
the
K.3 asymmetric Sections

, A bar with asymmetric cross section (without
and
no axis of symmetry) is given by the smaller of the cubic root of the following equation:
(
)(
(
) x 2
y 2
)(
)
the - N 2 ( N - N ) the = 0
N - N
N - N
N - N - N2 N - N
and ex
and ey
and ez
and and ey r
and and ex r
the
the
Where:
Nex, Ney, N ezX the
Y the
er the
are defined as K1.
/ ANNEX L
Page 156
156

Annex G (normative)
Openings souls of beams
L.1 This Annex applies to the design of steel beams and composite beams with section
cross
I or H, biapoiadas, continuous or semicontinuous with one or more openings in the soul.
In
addition:
- The cross section must be at least symmetrical relative to the axis passing through the
median plane of the soul;
- Cross-loading shall lie exclusively in the median plane of the soul, not
assuming the role of normal force.
L.2 When sizing for verification of ultimate limit states considering the influence
openings in the souls of the beams, including the placement of reinforcements when necessary should be
used specialized literature or foreign specification or standard, except for the situations
provided in L.3.
L.3 openings can be made
without reinforcement in beams whose souls have compared
h t / of the
w
maximum 376 E f / and whose relationship has compressed table
b
(/ t2 ) the maximum
y
fc
fc
038 E f / When the openings are located within the neutral zone, defined in L.4 and
y
Further to the provisions L.5 and L.6, whichever is applicable, the following requirements are met:
a) the yield strength of the steel must be less than or equal to 350 MPa;
b) the profile must have total height less than or equal to 1000 mm;
c) the profile should possess relationship between total height and width of largest table
d ( b / ) equal to or
f
greater than 1.20;
d) the pair bending moment-shear force corresponding to the center of the opening section should
be less than or equal to this couple in the same position, a beam biapoiada same vain,
subject to a maximum load evenly distributed as possible;
e) monossimtricos profiles must satisfy simultaneously the following relations:
100 The The
1f f 2
200
048 The The 131

f2 w
070 The The 261
1f w
The + The - h t > The
f2
w
thew
1f
f) composite beams must satisfy simultaneously the following relations:
t + h 160 mm
c
F
Page 157
b
3000 mm
Where:
b is the total width of the compressed table;
fc
t is the thickness of the compressed table;
157
fc
The is the largest area among the areas of the upper and lower tables;
f1
The
f2 is the smallest area among areas of the upper and lower tables;
The
the soul;
w is the area of
h is the height of the soul;
hthe
is the height of the openings;
t c is the thickness of the slab (in the case of slabs shaped embedded steel strip is
concrete above the ridge of the pan);
h is the rib height of the embedded steel formwork;
F
bf is the effective width of the concrete slab.
L.4 is defined as neutral zone region of the soul that originates in the center of the span and extends
toward the support of the beam (Figure L.1), in which an opening with certain
characteristics does not significantly affect the resistance to shear force and bending moment for
certain boundary conditions. The neutral zone should be considered always centered
compared to half the height of the profile. Abaci of figures L.2 l.10 to delimit the neutral zone
for beams with circular and rectangular openings
a = 2 h (Figure L.1). The relationship between
the
the
request calculation (S
d) And calculating the resistance (R d) To query the abacus must be
greater of the following values
in the region of positive or negative moment:
M
M
Sd
Rd
V
V
Sd
Rd
Where:
M Sdis the bending moment calculation requestor;
M is resistant bending moment calculation, determined in accordance with 5.4 and Annex Q,
Rd
whichever is applicable;
VSdis the shear force calculation requestor;
Page 158
158

VRd is resistant to shear force calculation, determined in accordance with 5.4.3 or Annex Q,
whichever is applicable;
L.5 In the case of beams with more than one opening, the minimum spacing between edges
adjacent openings, s, must meet the following criteria (Figure L.1):
- For rectangular openings:
h the
s
the
the V
V
Sd
pl - V
Sd
1.10
- Circular apertures:
1 5, D
s
the
V
the V
Sd
pl - V
Sd
110
Where:
D is the diameter of the openings;
the
theis the length of the openings;
the
Vp is the shear force corresponding to the shear yielding of the soul,
l
determined according to 5.4.3.2.2.
L.6 rectangular openings shall have rounded edges with a minimum radius of 16 mm
2 or t w, Whichever is greater.
L.7 To check the serviceability limit states should be taken into account properly
The influence of the openings.
Page 159
159
hthe
x the
the
the
L
neutral zone
d / d 2/3
S
kL
kL
L/2
L/2
Figure L.1 - Neutral zone
Page 160
160

00:50
00:45
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
10
00:20
12:15 0, 0,90
80
12:10
12:05
12:00
S
R
d
d
0.70
d/3
A circular openingthe
d/3
square opening h the
d/3
rectangular opening (2:1)the
/to2 = h
the
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 L20/ d 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
d / 3 in profiles
Figure L.2 - Neutral zone in non-composite beams with openings for Height
laminates
00:50
00:45
00:40
S
R
h / t 3.76
w
Ef
d/3
d/3
d
12:35
12:30
0,
k 00:25
90
0.95
0,80
00:20
12:15
0,70
12:10 0,60
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
00:45
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
00:20
12:15
S
R
d
d
rectangular opening (2:1)

d/3
the
/2=h
the
the
0,85
0.80
0.70
0.60
12:10
0.50
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
Figure L.3 - Neutral zone in composite beams with openings for Height
laminates
h / t 3.76 E f
w
y
d / 3 in profiles
Page 161
00:50
00:45
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
00:20
12:15
0,90
0,80
0,
12:10 70
S
R
161
d/2
d
d
10
0
12:05
0.60
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
00:45
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
00:20
12:15
S
R
0,80
0,70
0,90
d/2
d
d
10
0
12:10
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
00:45
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
00:20
12:15

d/2
the
/2=h
the
the
S
0,50
0,70
0,60
0,80
100
0,90
d
d
12:10
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
Figure L.4 - Neutral zone in non-composite beams for openings with height d / 2
laminates
h / t 3.76 E f
w
y
in profiles
Page 162
162

00:50
00:45
00:40
S
R
d/2
0,
85
12:35
d
12:30
0,80
k 00:25
00:20
0.70
12:15
12:10
0.60
0.50
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
00:45
square opening h
d/2
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
00:20
12:15
Rd
the
0,75
0,70
0.60
0.50
12:10
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
00:45
00:40
0.75
0.70
12:35
0.60
12:30
0.50
k 00:25
S
00:20
d
R
12:15
d
12:10
h d / 2
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
Figure L.5 - Neutral zone in composite beams for openings with height d / 2
laminates
h / t 3.76 E f
w
y
in profiles
Page 163
00:50
00:45
00:40
163
d/3
d/3
h d / 3
R
12:35
d
1
12:30
00
k 00:25
0,90
00:20
0,80
0,7
12:15
0,60 0
12:10 0,50
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
soldiers with h / t 3.76 E f
w
y
00:50
in profiles
d/2
00:45
d/2
00:40
12:35
12:30
S
d
k 00:25
R
1
d
00
00:20
0,90
0,80
0,70
12:15
0,60
12:10
0,50
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
00:45
00:40
S
R
d
12:35
12:30
0,95
0,90
k 00:25
0,80
00:20
0,70
0,60
12:15
0,50
12:10
h d / 2
12:05 rectangular opening (2:1)the
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
w
y
in profiles
Page 164
164

00:50
00:45
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
00:20
12:15
S
R
d/3
d/3
d
d
0.95
0.90
0.80
12:10
0.70
12:05
0.65
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
Figure L.8 - Neutral zone for openings in composite beams with high d / 3
in profiles
soldiers with
00:50
00:45
h / t 2.44
w
Ef
d/3
00:40
Rd
d/3
12:35
0.90
12:30
0.80
k 00:25
00:20
0.70
12:15
0.60
12:10
0.50
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
S
00:45
d
d/3
R
the
/2=h
00:40
the
the
d
12:35
0,90
12:30
0,80
k 00:25
0,70
00:20
12:15
0,60
12:10
0,50
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
Figure L.9 - Neutral zone for openings in composite beams with high d / 3
in profiles
w
y
Page 165
00:50
00:45
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
00:20
12:15
S
R
165
d/2
d
d
0.85
0.80
0.70
0.60
12:10
0.50
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
00:45
00:40
12:35
12:30
k 00:25
d/2
0.80
0.70
00:20
12:15
0.60
0.50
12:10
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
00:50
00:45
h d / 2
00:40
0.75
0.70
12:35
0.60
12:30
0.50
k 00:25
00:20
S
d
12:15
R
d
12:10
12:05
12:00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
L/d
Figure l.10 - Neutral zone in composite beams for openings with height d / 2
in profiles
w
y
/ ANNEX M
Page 166
166

Annex M (normative)
Fatigue
Applicability M.1
M.1.1 This Annex applies to structural steel elements and metallic bonds subject to actions
with large numbers of cycles, ranging from tensions in the elastic regime whose frequency and
magnitude are sufficient to initiate cracks and progressive collapse (fatigue).
M.1.2 The requirements given in the M.2 M.6 may not apply in part or in whole the
Welded connections involving one or more tubular profiles. It is recommended to check
these leads to fatigue, making the necessary changes to keep the level of
acceptability predicted by this standard, the use of AWS D1.1 and the following
Publication:
- Zhao, X.-L.; Herion, S.; Packer, JA; Puthli, RS; Sedlacek, G.; Wardenier, J.;
Weynand, K.; van Wingerde AM & Yeomans, NF (2000). Design guide for circular and
rectangular hollow section welded joints under fatigue loading. International Committee pour
le Developpement et l'Etude de la Construction tubulaire (CIDECT). TV Verlay
Rheinland. Germany.
M.2 General
M.2.1 The requirements of this Annex apply to calculated stresses based on charges not
weighted whose maximum value is equal to
066 f , Where yf is the yield strength of the steel.
y
M.2.2 The range of voltages is defined as the magnitude of the voltage change due
the application or removal of variables unweighted actions. In the case of the signal inversion
voltage at any point, the variation range of voltages should be determined by the difference
Algebraic the maximum and minimum voltage values
considered at this point.
M.2.3 In the case of butt joint welding with full penetration groove, the permissible limit
for the range of variation of stresses (
SR) Applies only to welds with internal quality
meeting the requirements of sections 6.12.2 and 6.13.2 of AWS D1.1: 2002.
M.2.4 No check for fatigue resistance is required if the variation range of voltages
is less than the threshold THgiven in Table M.1.
M.2.5 No checking fatigue resistance is required if the number of cycles
application of the load is less than 20,000.
M.2.6 The resistance to cyclic loads determined by the requirements of this Annex shall apply only
structures:
- With adequate corrosion protection or subject only slightly corrosive atmospheres
such as normal atmospheric conditions;
- Subject to temperatures below 150 C.
Page 167
M.3 Calculation of maximum voltage and the maximum variation range of voltages
M.3.1 The calculation of stresses should be based on elastic analysis. Tensions should not be
amplified by stress concentration factors due to geometrical discontinuities.
M.3.2 For screws and threaded round bars subjected to tension, the calculated stresses
should include the leverage effect, if any.
M.3.3 In case of combined axial force with bending moment, the maximum stresses, of each
type, should be determined by appropriate combinations of actions applied.
M.3.4 For beams with symmetric cross sections, bolts and welds should be
symmetrically about the axis of the bar or strains used in the calculation
of range of voltages must include the effects of eccentricity.
M.3.5 For angles subject to normal force, where the center of gravity of the connecting welds
lies between the lines passing through the center of gravity of the cross section of the bracket and
connected by the center tab, the effects of eccentricity can be ignored. If the center of
severity of welds lies outside this zone, the total stresses, including those due to
eccentricity should be included in the calculation of range of voltages.
M.4 permissible variation range of voltages
The range of voltages must not exceed the values
given below:
a) for categories of detail A, B, B ', C, D, E and E', the permissible range of variation of stresses,
In megapascals, is determined by:
SR
167
SR
= 327 C f
N
0333
TH
Where:
FSRis the allowable range of variation of stresses in megapascals;
Cf is the constant given in Table M.1 for the corresponding category;
N is the number of cycles of variation of tension during the useful life of the structure;
is the permissible limit of range of voltages, for an infinite number of
TH
cycles request, given in Table M.1, in megapascals.
b) to detail the category of F, the allowable variation range of stresses,
given by:
SR
10 4 C
11
f
N
0167
SR, Must be
TH
c) for elements of traction plate attached by welds at the end of slot

full penetration welds slot partial penetration fillet welds or combinations
Page 168
168
Earlier, disposed transversely to the direction of the stresses, the allowable range for
stresses in the cross section of the plate pulled at the transition line between the base metal and the
Soldering must be determined as follows:
- Based on early cracking from the transition line between the base metal and the
weld detail category for C, by the following equation:
SR
0333
14 4 10 11
68 9 MPa
N
- Based on initiation of cracks from the root of the weld in the case of welding slot
partial penetration or fillet welds without reinforcing or contouring to
detail category C ', by the following equation:
SR
= 172 R
14 4 10 11
PJP
N
0333
Where:
RPJPis the reduction factor for welds notch partial penetration, with or without
= 1 0,Use category detail C) given by:
fillet reinforcement (if R
PJP
065 - 059
R
PJP
2 the
t
+ 072
p
0
t 167
p
w
t
1 0,
2a is the length of the face unwelded root in the direction of plate thickness
pulled in mm;
w is the size of the leg of the fillet or contour enhancement, if any, toward the
tensioned plate thickness, in millimeters;
t p is the thickness of the sheet pulled in millimeter.
- Based on initiation of cracks from the roots of a pair of solder fillets
cross on opposite sides of the plate pulled to category C'' detail by
the following equation:
SR
= 172 R
14 4 10 11
FIL
N
0333
Where:
RFILis the reduction factor for joints up only a couple of fillet weld
= 1 0,.
Cross. Use category detail is C
R
FIL
Page 169
006 + 072
R
FIL
t 0167
p
169
w
t
p 1 0,
M.5 screws and threaded round bars

The range of voltages must not exceed the permissible range calculated as follows:
a) bolted subject to the court on the screws, the permissible range of variation
stress in the material of the element bound is given by the following equation, where C
given in section 2 of Table M.1:
SR
327 C
N
0333
F are
f andTH
TH
b) for high strength bolts, common bolts and threaded round bars with
laminated, cut or machined thread, the range of variation of tensile stresses in the net area
the bolt or threaded round bar, from normal force and bending moment
including leverage, must not exceed the allowable range given by the following
equation:
SR
327 C
N
0333
TH
The C factorshould be taken equal to 3.9 x10 8 (For category E '). The limit
f
is taken equal to 48 MPa (as for D). The effective area shall be determined
as 6.3.2.2.
should
TH
For joints in which the material within the handle is not limited to steel or joints which not
are pre-tensioned according to the requirements of Table 16, the normal force and the moment
including leverage (if any) should be regarded as passed
exclusively by threaded screws or round bars.
For joints in which the material within the handle is limited to steel, pretensioned
according to the requirements of the table 16 allows an analysis of the relative rigidity of the parts
connected and bolts to determine the range of variation of tensile stresses in
pretensionados screws due to the normal force and the bending moment including effect
lever. Alternatively, the variation range of tension in the bolt can be considered
equal to 20% of net area stress due to axial force and bending moment from
all actions, permanent and variable.
M.6 special requirements of fabrication and assembly
M.6.1 is allowed to plates of longitudinal expected to be left in place and, if used,
must be continuous. If amendments are required to the plates of waiting in long joints, such
amendments shall be made with solder slot full penetration and excess solder should be
abraded prior to positioning along the bar in the joint.
Page 170
170
M.6.2 In transverse joints subject to tensile, plates, wait, if used, should be

removed and you need root extraction and counter the weld joint.
M.6.3 In T joints or corner, made
with solder slot full penetration, a trickle of
reinforcement not less than 6 mm should be added in the reentrant corners.
M.6.4 The surface roughness of the torch cut edges, subject to variations of tracks
significant stresses shall not exceed 25 microns using as the reference standard ASME
B46.1.
M.6.5 reentrant corners in areas of cuts, cut-outs and openings for access Welding
must not form a radius smaller than 10 mm. To this must be done a sub-hole or broqueado
subpuncionado with smaller radius, machined subsequently to the end beam. Alternatively, the radius
can be obtained by flame cutting, in which case, to grind the cut surface to
the state of shiny metal.
M.6.6 For transverse joints soldered slot full penetration in regions of tension
high traction extenders should be used to ensure that the end of the weld occurs
out of the finished board. The extenders should be removed and the end of the weld should be
facemills polished up with the edge of the connected parts. Limiters at the ends of the gasket not
should be used.
M.6.7 See section 6.2.6.2.6 for requirements on returns on certain fillet welds subject to
cyclic loadings.
Page 171
171
Table M.1 - Parameters of fatigue

Description
Category
voltage
Constant C f
limit
Potential point of beginning
TH
(MPa)
cleft
Section 1 - base material away from any welding

1.1 Base metal except steel
resistant
to
corrosion
Atmospheric not painted with
Laminated surfaces subject
or not the cleaning surface.
The
250x108
165
Cut edges torched
with surface roughness not
greater than 25 microns but not
reentrant corners.
1.2 Metal sturdy steel base
atmospheric corrosion not
painted
with
surfaces
laminated, or not subject to
surface cleaning. Edges
B
120x108
110
cut with a torch
surface roughness does not
greater than 25 microns but not
reentrant corners.
1.3 Parts
with
holes
drilled or widened. Parts
with reentrant corners
clippings
or
other
B
120x108
110
geometrical discontinuities
meeting the requirements of
M.6, except for openings
Access welding.
1.4
Sections transverse
laminated with openings for
access
of
welding
meeting the requirements of
6.1.14 and M.6. Pieces with holes C
44x108
69
drilled
or
extended
containing screws connecting
light bracings,
with short application.
Section 2 - Materials connected bolted
Gross Section 2.1 of the base metal
Away from any welding

or structural bond.
Away from any welding

or structural bond.
In any outer edge

or perimeter of opening.
In reentrant corners
openings for access
welding or any hole
small (may contain
screws for connections
unimportant).
joints overlap with

high strength bolts
satisfying all requirements
apply friction connections.
2.2 Base metal at net section
together with screws in high
Resistance calculated based
in contact resistance,
however, with manufacturing and
installation serving all
requirements for connections
by friction.
other bolted
except lugs and plates
connected by pin.
Through the gross section

next to the hole.
120x108
110
120x108
110
In net section with

origin on the edge of the hole.
22x108
48
In net section with

origin on the edge of the hole.
Page 172
172

Table M.1 - Fatigue Parameters (continued)
Description
Category
voltage
Constant C f
limit
TH
(MPa)

eyelets and plates connected by
pin.
11x108
31
Starting point
potential crack
In net section with
origin at the edge of
hole.
Section 3 - Connections welded components of bars composed of sheets or profiles

3.1 Base metal and weld metal
bars without fittings,
From the surface
Composite sheets or profiles
or
discontinuities
connected by longitudinal welds
B
120x108
110
internal weld in
continuous slot of
spaced points
full penetration, with extraction
end of the weld.
root and counter-welding or
continuous fillet welds.
bars without fittings,
From the surface
Composite sheets or profiles
or discontinuities
internal weld,
B'
61x108
83
continuous slot of
including solder
full penetration, with plates
the connection plate
expected not removed, or
hold.
continuous fillet welds.
welding the ends
Longitudinal openings
access for welding rods
composed.
3.4
Metal
base
at the
ends of segments
longitudinal
of
welds
Intermittent fillet.
3.5
Metal
base
at the
ends
of
lamellae
welded
of length
partial, narrower than the
table
having ends
esquadrejadas or reduction
gradually in width, with or without
welds
transverse
at the
22x108
48
From the end

Weld, penetrating the
soul or desk.
11x108
31
In the bound material in

local start and end
deposition welding.
On the table at the foot of

transverse weld
end, the table
by the end of
wider or
ends,
than
more
the lamellae
table with welds
the transverse ends.
also
longitudinal
the edgeweld,
of theortable
with wider lamella.
Table 20 Thickness mm
11x108
31
Table thickness> 20 mm
3.6
Metal
base
at the
ends
of
lamellae
welded
of length
partial wider than the table
without transverse welds in
ends.
E'
8
3.9 x10
18
E'
8
3.9 x10
18
At the edge of the table by

the end of the weld
the lamella.
Page 173
173

Description
Category
voltage
Constant C f
limit TH
(MPa)
Section 4 - Connects end with longitudinal fillet welds

4.1 Base metal at junction of
bars requested axially
with end connections
welded longitudinally. The
welds should be on each side
the bar axis, so that
balance the stresses in the weld.
t 13 mm
11x108
Starting point
potential crack
Starting from
any end
welding, extending the
base metal.
31
8
E'
3.9 x10
18
Section 5 - Connects welded transverse to the direction of stress
in
amendmentsof profiles
rolled or welded section
From
similar cross-sectional made
discontinuities
penetration groove welds
B
120x108
110
the internal metal
Overall, these welds must
welding
or along the
be flush with the metal
face melting.
base
by
middle of
grinding toward the
applied voltages.
in seams with solder
cutout full penetration,
Transitions having a width
From
or thick with slope
discontinuities
between 8 and 20%; welds must
the internal metal
be flush with the base metal
welding or along the
by grinding in
face melting or
direction of the applied voltages.
beginning of the transition
when f 620MPa.
y
f < 620MPa
B
120x108
110
y
t> 13 mm
B'
f 620MPa
y
5.3
Metal base
with
f 620MPa and weld metal
y
in seams with solder
going transition width
taken with radius equal to or greater
61x108
83
From
discontinuities
600
mm,towith
the point
tangent
the edge
of the
weld penetration; welds
should be flush with the
metal base by
grinding toward the
applied voltages.
120x108
110
the internal
metalthe
welding
or along
face melting.
Page 174
174

Description
Category
voltage

in seams, joints or T
corner joints with welds
transition thickness having
C
with inclination between 8 and 20%
without transition or thickness,
when the excess solder does not
is removed.
in crosslinked
top or T or corner, in
ends of element
traction plate made with
penetration groove welds
partial, supplemented with
fillet weld reinforcement or
contour; F SRshould be as small
of the following two values:
Home cleft from the
C
transition between the weld metal and
basis.
Early crack at the root of
solder.
crosslinks in the
ends of element
traction plate made with
two solder fillets on sides
opposite the plate; FSRmust be
the smaller of two values
following:
C'
Home cleft from the

transition between the weld metal andC
basis.
Early crack at the root of
solder.
5.7 Metal Based on elements
traction plate and base metal
souls in beams or tables in
C''
Constant C f
44x108
44x108
limit
TH
(MPa)
69
69
Starting point
potential crack
From
discontinuities
the superficial
transition between the weld and
the base metal
extending the metal
base, or along the
face melting.
From
discontinuities
the geometric
the base metal
extending the metal
base, or from the root
weld subjected to tensile
extending through
the weld.
0333
SR= 172RPJP1441011
Not anticipated.
N
44x108
69
From
discontinuities
the geometric
the base metal
extending the metal
base, or from the root
weld subjected to tensile
extending through
the weld.
0333
SR= 172RFIL1441011
N
Not anticipated.
44x108
69
From
discontinuities
geometries in the foot
transverse
foot
fillet weld
stiffeners
adjacent
soldiers.
extending
fillet weld
the metal
basis.
Page 175
175

Description
Category
voltage
Constant C f
limit
TH
(MPa)
Section 6 - Metal based on crosslinked welded bars

6.1 Base metal in connection
an accessory made with solder
longitudinal slot
full penetration, subject to
longitudinal request when
detail of the transition
accessory is made with a radius
R and polished weld in
Terminations for
agreement:
R 600mm
120x108
110
600 mm > R 150mm
44x108
69
150 mm > R 50mm
22x108
48
50 mm > R
an enhancement of coplanar
same thickness made from
longitudinal weld groove
subject to full penetration
cross-demand, or
without longitudinal request
detail when the transition
the fitting is done with a
radius R and polished weld
the terminal points for
agreement:
11x108
31
120x108
110
44x108
69
22x108
48
11x108
31
120x108
110
Starting point
potential crack
Near the point of

tangency on
end of
accessory.
When excess solder is

removed:
R 600mm
600 mm > R 150mm
150 mm > R 50mm
50 mm > R
When excess solder not
is removed:
R 600mm
Near the point of

tangency on
end of
accessory, or the
welding, face melting,
the main element
or accessory.
600 mm > R 150mm
44x108
69
150 mm > R 50mm
22x108
48
50 mm > R
11x108
31
In the
transition
the
and
welding
the between
base metal
can be at the edge
the main part or in
accessory.
Page 176
176

Description
Category
voltage
Constant C f
limit TH
(MPa)
Starting point
potential crack

an enhancement of coplanar
made with different thickness
longitudinal weld groove
subject to full penetration
cross-demand, or
without longitudinal request
agreement:
When excess solder is
removed:
R> 50 mm
R 50 mm
22x108
48
11x108
31
When excess solder not

is removed:
Any ray
6.4 Base metal subject to tensions
along the longitudinal links
transverse bars, or
withouttensions transverse,
fillet or groove
partial penetration when
detail
of transition
R and polished weld in
Terminations for
agreement:
R> 50 mm
22x108
48
R 50 mm
11x108
31
11x108
31
In the transition between the

and welding the base metal in
edge of the material
thinner.
From the end
the weld.
and welding the base metal in
edge of the material
thinner.
At the end of
welding or from
the base metal
extending the metal
base or accessory.
Page 177
177

Description
Category
voltage
Constant C f
limit
TH
(MPa)
Section 7 - Base metal fittings along the short

7.1 Base metal subject to
longitudinal request, along with
accessories connected by welds
longitudinal slot of
full penetration when
detail
of transition
R less than 50 mm,
length of the accessory
longitudinal direction equal aae
normal to the surface height
same bar ab:
the <
50 mm
Starting point
potential crack
In the base metal near the

end of the weld.
44x108
69
50 mm 12b or 100mm
22x108
48
a> 12 b or 100mm
when b 25 mm
11x108
31
a> 12 b or 100mm
when b> 25mm
7.2 Base metal subject to tensions
along the longitudinal accessories
with
or
without tensions
cross-linked by welds
longitudinal fillet or
Slot partial penetration,
agreement:
E'
8
3.9 x10
18
R> 50 mm
22x108
48
R 50 mm
11x108
Section 8 - Miscellaneous
31
8.1 Base metal at the

type shear connectors
connected by pin with head
fillet weld or electro-fusion.
44x108
69

and welding the base metal.
Throat of the weld.
8.2 Shear on throat

fillets transverse welds
or longitudinal continuous or
intermittent.
8.3 Base metal at the welds
At the end of
extending the welding
base metal.
150x1010
F
0167
4
= 11 10 Cf
SR
TH
N
55
11x108
31
At the end of
buffer holes or tears.
weld in the base metal.
Page 178
178

Description
Category
voltage
Constant C f
limit
TH
(MPa)
150x1010
8.4 Shear in welds
buffer holes or tears.
8.5 High-strength bolts

Total installed without prestressing,
Common bolts and bars
round threaded with thread
laminated, cut or machined.
E'
Range of variation of stress
Traction calculated based
in net area, including effect
lever when applicable.
0167
4
= 11 10 Cf
SR
TH
N
55
8
3.9 x10
48
Starting point
potential crack
In the flat transition
between the solder and the metal
basis.
At the root of the thread

extending the
net section.
Page 179
Table M.1 - Parameters of fatigue - Details (continued)
Section 1 - base material away from any welding
1.1 and 1.2
1.3
1.4
Section 2 - Materials connected bolted

2.1
Vista
sheet
removed overlapping
2.2
Vista
sheet
removed overlapping
2.3
2.4
Section 3 - Connections welded components of bars composed of sheets or profiles

3.1
or
* Weld penetration groove
or
179
Page 180
180

Section 3 - soldered connections of the components of bars composed of sheets or profiles (continued)
3.2
*
* Weld slot full penetration
3.3
3.4
50-150
3.5
3.6
No soldering
Typical
Section 4 - Connects end with longitudinal fillet welds
4.1
t = thickness
t = thickness
Section 5 - Connects welded transverse to the direction of stress

5.1
5.2
Weld full penetration groove - grinding
fy 620 MPa
Cat B
Page 181
181

Section 5 - Connects welded transverse to the direction of tension (continued)
5.3
R 600 mm
Weld Notch
full penetration
- Grinding
5.4
fy 620 MPa
Cat B
Potential start site
cracking due to stresses
traction in flexion
Weld Notch
full penetration
5.5
Start Location
potential
cracking due
Weld Notch
Weld Notch
the voltage
partial
penetration
partial penetration
traction in flexion
5.6
Fissure potential
due to traction
deriving bending
5.7
Section 6 - Metal based on crosslinked welded bars

6.1
Page 182
Weld
Notch
penetration
total
Weld
Notch
penetration
total
182

Section 6 - Metal based on crosslinked welded bars (continued)
6.2
G = grinding up facemills
*

6.3
*
G = grinding up facemills

6.4
or
* Weld Notch partial penetration

Section 7 - Base metal fittings along the short
7.1
(Average)
Page 183
183
Table M.1 - Parameters of fatigue - Details (conclusion)

Section 7 - Metal base with a short accessories (continued)
7.2
or *
* Weld Notch partial penetration

Section 8 - Miscellaneous
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Locations
fissure
Locations
fissure
Locations
fissure
/ ANNEX N
Page 184
184

Annex C (normative)
Specific requirements for bars of varying section
N.1 Applicability
N.1.1 This Annex applies to the bars of variable section that meet the following requirements:
- The cross sections should be I, H or coffin, with two axes of symmetry;
- Tables must have constant section between sections contained against instability;
- The height (s) soul (s) should vary linearly between sections contained against instability.
N.1.2 The calculation and design of bars of variable section that meets the requirements listed in
N.1.1 must be made in accordance with the requirements contained in section 5 of this document, except in
The following cases, in which some adaptations are required.
N.2 Normal Force sturdy traction calculation
The normal force resistant traction calculation shall be determined in accordance with the
requirements of subsection 5.2, taking the gross cross-sectional area of
lower height and
net area of
the section subject to breakage.
N.3 Normal force resistant compression calculation
The normal force resistant compression calculation shall be determined in accordance with the
requirements of subsection 5.3, taking the dimensions and geometric properties of the section
lower height. Furthermore, the determination of elastic buckling stresses, the coefficients of
buckling by bending around the axis perpendicular to the spirit and torque must be
determined by rational analysis or using specialized bibliography (the coefficient of
buckling by bending around the axis perpendicular to the tables can be determined as
for prismatic bars).
N.4 resistant bending moment calculation for non-slender beams and slender
N.4.1 The resistant bending moment calculation for the limit state of lateral buckling with
twist between sections contained laterally, can not be less than the bending moment requestor
calculation of the section where most compressive stress occurs at the tables. For this limit state
apply the requirements of subsection 5.4, but determining the modification factor for
bending moment diagram is not uniform C
b, Or rationale for using bibliography
specialized or, optionally, by taking this coefficient equal to 1.0.
N.4.2 In determining the parameters of slenderness ,
be adopted geometric properties of greater height section.
any limit state are

p andrFor
/ ANNEX P
Page 185
Annex P (normative)
Best practices for implementing structures
P.1 General Provisions
185
P.1.1 Scope
In this Annex best practices for running steel structures are established
buildings. These practices should be extended to joint structures whenever possible. In addition
that, in the absence of other instructions in the contract documents, business practices here
contained will serve as a rule for the manufacture and assembly of the structure.
P.1.2 Settings
P.1.2.1 Engineer / Architect
Designated by the owner as his representative authority with overall responsibility for
project and the integrity of the structure.
P.1.2.2 contract document
Documents that define the responsibilities of the parties involved in the bidding, purchasing,
fabrication and erection of the structure. Such documents usually consist of a contract,
drawings and specifications.
P.1.2.3 Drawings
P.1.2.3.1 Design drawings
Design drawings executed by the party responsible for structure design
P.1.2.3.2 Drawings manufacturing and assembly
Manufacturing drawings and assembly field, and the responsibility of the manufacturer or
fitter for execution of work.
P.1.2.3.3 Detalhador
Entity that produces manufacturing drawings and assembly.
P.1.2.4 Assembler
The structure responsible for assembling the part.
P.1.2.5 Manufacturer
The responsible for the manufacture of steel structure part.
P.1.2.6 General Contractor
A contractor hired by the owner with full responsibility for building
structure.
Page 186
186
P.1.2.7 Laminated Materials

Rolled Steel acquired specifically to meet the requirements of a
particular project.
P.1.2.8 release for construction

Release owner, allowing manufacturing to be initiated under the conditions
contract, including the ordering of raw materials and the preparation of fabrication drawings.
P.1.2.9 SSPC
"Steel Structures Painting Council," responsible for the publication of "Steel Structures Painting
Manual ", volume 2 (" Systems and Specifications ").
P.1.3 Design criteria for buildings and similar structures
The clauses of this standard governing the design of steel and composite structures for buildings, unless
there are other requirements in the contract documents.
P.1.4 Responsibility Project
P.1.4.1 When the owner to provide design, drawings and specifications, the manufacturer and the
assembler are not responsible for the correctness, suitability or legality of the project.
P.1.4.2 The manufacturer is not responsible for practicality or safety of assembly
If this structure is performed by a third party.
P.1.4.3 If the owner wishes that the manufacturer or assembler run the project, drawings and
specifications or assume any responsibility for the correctness, suitability, or
legality of the project, should clearly state your requirements in the contractual documents.
P.1.5 patented devices
Except where the contractual documents require the project to be provided by the manufacturer
or assembler, manufacturer and assembler assume that all patent rights necessary
have been acquired by the owner, and that the manufacturer or assembler will fully
protected and free to use designs, patented devices or parts required by
contractual documents.
P.1.6 Security Mount
P.1.6.1 The assembler must be responsible for the security and methods of assembly
structure.
P.1.6.2 The engineer shall be responsible for the adequacy of the structure in the project, not
responsible, however, for the functions described in P.1.6.1.
Page 187
P.2 Classification of materials
P.2.1 Structural Steel
The term "Structural Steel", when used in defining the scope of work in the documents
contract only consists of the following items:
- Anchor bolts for steel structure;
187
- Basis of structural steel;

- Laminated beams;
- Base plates for steel structure;
- Connections;
- Bracings;
- Pillars;
- Crane rails, bumpers, batten seams, bolts and nuts;
- Frames of doors or gates that are part of the steel structure;
- Expansion joints connected to the steel;
- Means of connection of the steel structure:
screws
of factory for links
screws
Used
screws
of field
for fix
permanent s
parts for thetransport and

of structure
for links
permanent s
- Floor plates (chess or smooth) connected to the steel;

- Welded structural steel beams
- Tapamentos sleepers;
- Grids of structural steel beams;
- Structural steel hangers, when connected to the steel;
- Leveling plates;
- Stated or listed spars in the project;
- Foundations for machines made of laminated and / or plates profiles, related to the structure and indicated
the drawings of the structure;
- Structural steel canopies;
Page 188
188

- Monorail beams, structural profiles, when attached to the structure;
- Permanent pins;
- Tuesdays;
- Spacers, angles, tees, cleats and other fasteners essential to
steel structure;
- Shear connectors;
- Steel cables that are a permanent part of the steel structure;

- Struts;
- Supports made of steel profiles, pipes, conveyors and similar structures;
- Supports false ceilings made of steel profiles with a height equal to or greater section of the
75 mm;
- Rods and hangers, main or auxiliary, forming part of the steel structure;
- Trusses.
Other items p.2.2 steel or metal
The classification "structural steel" does not include items of steel, iron or other metal not
specifically listed under P.2.1, even if such items have been indicated on the drawings
as part of the structure or connected to it. These items include, but are not limited to:
- Bars and wire forms;
- Various metals;
- Metal ornaments;
- Chimneys, storage tanks and pressure vessels;
- Required for the assembly of materials provided by third parties other than items
manufacturers or assemblers of steel structure;
- Hoods;
- Handrails.
P.3 Drawings and Specifications
P.3.1 Steel structures
P.3.1.1 To ensure that proposals are appropriate and complete documents
contract should include drawings of the steel structure project clearly showing
Page 189
work to be performed, indicating dimensions, sections, steel types and positions of all parts,
levels of floors, center lines and removal of pillars, contraflechas and them consisting
sufficient size to accurately report the amount and type of steel parts
189

Design and Execution of Steel Structures and Composite Steel-Concrete Buildings

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Design and Execution of Steel Structures and Composite Steel-Concrete Buildings

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Page 1

AUG 2003 Draft Revision of ISO 8800

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

except when some restriction is made

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

- Distance in general; distance between transverse stiffeners; region height

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

- Characteristic strength of the concrete density

- Thickness of the stiffener

3.2.1.2 Roman Uppercase

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

- Initial secant modulus of elasticity of concrete at the limit of resistance

- Resistant to bending moments calculated respectively around the axes x

Rd,dirrespectively, module of composite beams subjected to negative moment in

M- Bending moment resistant characteristic in the region of negative moment

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

- Shear resistant feature

3.2.1.3 Greek Lowercase

- Related to sizing the compression curve coefficient; coefficient

- Weighting the strength of steel armor

3.2.1.4 Greek Uppercase

- Deformation capacity of the armature bars

3.2.2 Symbols subscribed

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

3.2.2.2 Roman Uppercase

temperature variations during assembly, must be given the variation ranges

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

4.5.2 Structural Steels and metal bonding materials

4.5.2.5.3 The steel shear connectors C profile cold-formed must obey

c) coefficient of thermal expansion,

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

4.5.3 Concrete and steel reinforcement

c) coefficient of thermal expansion,

ckn is the resistance

= 24 kN / m 3 in concrete without armor and

4.6 Basis for sizing

4.6.2 Scaling to limit states

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

j, f factors are effective combination of live loads that may act

Table 1 - Weighting coefficients actions

Other variables actions

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

FGi are the permanent actions;

Table 2 - Factors combo and use factors

if applicable, by the use of attachments H and J, which values

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

4.8.3.3.2 In some structures sensitive to horizontal displacements, the bending moment

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

B = 1If the normal force on the bar requesting calculation, N

Sd, For traction.

4.8.3.4 Analysis approximate second order

4.8.4.3 The effect of initial imperfections is to be applied in all horizontal directions

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

4.8.5 Strength and stiffness of containments

a) Containment in compressed bars

b) Containment flexed in bars

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

where MSdC dH the

is the weighting coefficient of rigidity equal to 1.35;

E is the modulus of elasticity of steel;

NBR 8800 - Based Text Revision

If secis less than